CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 7 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Name of the Work:- Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning Audio Visual, FAS, SAS, CCTV, BMS & Stage Lighting Work at Auditorium on Plot No. 37, Sector 5, Airoli, Navi Mumbai.
From 12/03/2015 from 10.00 A.M. onwards to 01/04/2015 Upto 13.00 P.M. during working hours downloaded from official web site (www.nmmc.maharashtra.etenders.in / www.nmmconline.com) of Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation.
6 Cost of each Tender form
Rs. 10,000/- to be paid by Net Banking/ any banks credit or debit card.
7 Earnest Money Rs. 2,02,300/- to be paid by Net Banking/any banks credit or debit card/ Bank Guarantee.
8 Pre-bid meeting shall be held on 30/03/2015 at 15.00 Hrs. at Head Office Building, Belapur, Navi Mumbai in the Conference of Joint City Engineer (N.M.M.C.).
9 E- Tender submission Period
01/04/2015 from 15.00 P.M. onwards to 07/04/2015 Upto 15.00 P. M.
10 E- Tender Opening 07/04/2015 Upto 16.00 Hours (If possible) 11 Eligibility Criteria a Registration Class A and above category with Public Work Department (PWD)
or its equivalent Class with City & industrial Development Corporation (CIDCO)/ Maharashtra Jeevan Pradhikaran (MJP)/ Central Public Work Department (CPWD) (As per dept. requirement) Copy of the relevant certificate should be uploaded.
b Turnover Average annual financial turnover during the last 3 Years, ending 31st March of the previous financial year should be at least 30% of the estimated cost. Audited Financial statements for previous (Y-1), (Y-2), (Y-3) year should be uploaded.
c Experience Experience of having successfully completed similar works during last 7 years ending last day of month previous to the one in which applications are invited should be either of the following. a) Three similar completed works costing not less than the amount
equal to 40% of the estimated cost Or b) Two similar completed works costing not less than the amount
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 8 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
equal to 50% of the estimated cost
Or
a) One similar completed work costing not less than the amount
equal to 80% of the estimated cost
Completion certificate should be uploaded
d Qualified Persons The contractor shall have following Engineers dedicated for this job
at all times at site.
1. One Instrumentation Engineers having minimum 3years
experience & similar to the items to be executed.
2. One I.T. Engineer having minimum 7years experience in setting
& commissioning of BMS system & works as mentioned in bid
documents.
3. One Electronic / Electrical Engineer having minimum 7years
Experience in setting up A.V. system. e Joint Venture Joint Venture is not allowed.
f Documents to be
uploaded/attached
1) CIDCO/ PWD/ CPWD registration
2) Power of Attorney for signing tender document, if applicable
3) Copy of partnership deed, if applicable
4) Bank Solvency (equivalent to 20% of estimated cost)
5) VAT Registration certificate
6) NMMC LBT Registration certificate
7) Undertaking of Tenderer on Rs. 100 stamp as per annexure – 2
8) Firm Details in Annexure-3
9) PAN Card Copy/Income Tax Number
10) Service Tax/ Works Contract Tax certificate copy
11) Company or Firm Registration Certificate (Shop Act/
Incorporation Certificates)
12) Works Experience certificate
13) Technical Staff detailed list as per Annexure-8
14) CA certified Last 3 years turnover certificate
15) Affidavit on Rs.100 stamp paper as per Annexure-9
16) List of plant and machinery as per Annexure-7
17) List of Work in hand as per Annexure-6
(All bidders are required to submit original Undertaking &
Affidavit with all other uploaded documents for submission of bid
and original bank guarantee towards EMD (if uploaded) up to
09/04/2015 within working hours in the office of Executive
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 11 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
DETAILED TENDER NOTICE
1.0 NOTICE INVITING TENDERS Online tenders are invited by and on behalf of Commissioner, Navi Mumbai Municipal
Corporation (NMMC) from eligible Tenderers for the proposed work specified in the Schedule ‘A’.
2.0 ISSUE OF TENDER:- 2.1 For work of Estimate amount less than Rs. 3 lakhs, Tender copy will be made available
at E-tendering cell, Ground Floor, NMMC Head Office, Govardhani Chowk, Plot No.1, Sector-15A, CBD, Belapur from date of publish of Tender Notice or Contractor may buy tender book from E- tendering website www.nmmc.maharashtra.etenders.in or www.nmmconline.com.
2.2 For work of tender amount Rs. 3 lakhs & above, tender book will be issued online only though E-tendering Website www.nmmc.maharashtra.etenders.in or www.nmmconline.com
2.3 Price of Blank Tender form cost must be paid in cash/ Demand Draft in NMMC’s Account Department and Receipt of the same should be given to E-tendering cell.
2.4 The Tender Document is not transferable. Only the Tenderer who has purchased the tender form shall be entitled to bid in the Tender.
3.0 LANGUAGE OF TENDER / CONTRACT:- The language of the Tender shall be English/ Marathi and all correspondence, drawings, etc., shall conform to English/ Marathi language.
4.0 CLARIFICATIONS BY TENDERER AND PRE-TENDER CONFERENCE:- 4.1 A Pre-Tender Conference of all the intending Tenderers will also be held at the scheduled
date and time indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the tender. Intending Tenderers will be allowed to seek clarification and suggest suitable modifications in specifications, conditions of the Contract, etc. The Corporation will communicate such changes that are accepted by it, to all the intending Tenderers who have purchased the Tender document from the Corporation. Only such changes that are so communicated shall be binding on the Corporation and all the Tenderers.
4.2 The Tenderer should get its doubts cleared during pre-bid meeting only, if provided in the
Tender. In case no pre-bid meeting is to be held, the Tenderer should seek clarification of any doubt in writing seven (7) days before the last date for receipt of Tenders.
5.0 VALIDITY OF BIDS:- 5.1 The Tenders will be valid for a period of 120 days from the date of its opening.
6.0 EARNEST MONEY:- 6.1 The Tenderer shall deposit the amounts indicated in the Tender Notice as Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)., In case of tender 3 lakhs and above the Earnest Money shall be deposited in the form of Net Banking/any banks credit or debit card/ Bank Guarantee. For tender below 3 lakh, Earnest Money shall be deposited in the form of a fixed deposit with the Corporation or a bank guarantee as per format indicated in Annexure 1. The
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 12 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
failure to deposit the Earnest Money shall disqualify the Tender and the Corporation shall
exclude from its consideration such disqualified Tender(s). No interest shall be payable
by the Corporation in respect of such deposited Earnest Money.
The tenderer should refer user’s guide while depositing EMD though the e-tendering
website www.nmmc.maharashtra.etenders.in
6.2 If the Corporation accepts the Tender, the Earnest Money shall be appropriated towards
Security Deposit payable by the Tenderer in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
Alternatively on payment of the required amount of the Security Deposit and the
execution of the Contract Agreement, the Earnest Money shall be returned to the
Tenderer.
7.0 FORFEITURE OF EMD 7.1 The Tenderer shall not revoke his Tender or vary its terms and conditions without the
consent of the Corporation during the validity period of Tender, failing which the Earnest
Money deposited by it shall stand forfeited to the Corporation without prejudice to its
other rights and remedies and the Tenderer shall be disentitled to submit a Tender to the
Corporation for execution of any work during the next twenty-four (24) months effective
from the date of such revocation.
7.2 If the successful Tenderer does not pay the Security Deposit in the prescribed time limit
or fails to sign the agreement bond, The Earnest Money Deposit will be forfeited by the
Corporation.
8.0 REFUND OF EARNEST MONEY 8.1 The Earnest Money of unsuccessful Tenderers shall be refunded after the successful
Tenderer furnishes the required Initial Security Deposit to the Corporation and signs the
Contract Agreement or within thirty (30) days of the expiry of validity period of Tenders,
whichever is earlier.
9.0 COST OF TENDER 9.1 The Tenderer shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of its
Tender. Price of Blank Tender form must be paid by Net Banking /any banks credit or
debit card.
9.2 Tender Service Charges The Tenderer shall bear all costs associated with tender services.
The tender service is provided by M/s. SIFY Technologies ltd.-Nextenders India Pvt.
Ltd.As per Govt. Rule No. DIT/file-2012/C.No. 273/39 dt.19th
January, 2013. Tenderer
has to pay Rs. 882 + Taxes as tender service charges directly to the service providers.
The Corporation shall in no case be responsible or liable for these costs, regardless of the
conduct or the out come of the Tendering Process.
10.0 ELIGIBLE TENDERERS:
10.1 Only those Tenderers who fulfill the eligibility criteria as mentioned in Schedule A of the
Tender are eligible to submit their Tenders for this work. The documents indicated
against each of the eligibility criteria shall be required to be submitted along with the
technical bid to establish the eligibility of the Tenderer.
10.2 The Corporation shall usually hold a Tenderer eligible for the Tender subject to the
condition that the price tendered by him together with the value of outstanding work/
contracts under execution by him for the Corporation or any other employer shall not be
more than four times the value of average annual turnover of works / contracts executed
during the preceding three financial years ending 31st March.
11.0 SPARE CAPACITY OF WORK FOR TENDERING:-
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 13 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The tenderers shall be eligible to submit the tender to the N.M.M.C. subject to the
essential conditions that the price tendered by him together with the value of outstanding
works under execution by him for the N.M.M.C. or any other employer shall not be more
than four times the value of the average annual turnover of works excluded during the
preceding three financial years ending 31st March.
12.0 RELATION SHIP WITH CORPORATOR (S):-
Tenderer shall not be associated presently or in the past with any of the office bearer or
Corporator of the Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation or Member of N.M.M.C. either
directly or indirectly as specified in section 10(f), (g) of BPMC Act. 1949. The Tenderer
shall furnish an Affidavit on a Non-Judicial stamp paper of Rs.10/- If any Information so
furnished shall be found to be untrue or false, the tender shall be liable to be disqualified
and the Earnest Money accompanying such tender shall stand forfeited to the N.M.M.C.
If the information so furnished shall be found to be untrue or false during the currency of
the contract the Tenderer shall be held to be in-default and the contract if any awarded to
it shall be liable to be terminated with its consequences.
13.0 TIME OF COMPLETION:- The period of completion of Works is enumerated under Schedule ‘A’. The time of
completion shall commence from the date of placing the Work Order or date of handing
over the site whichever is earlier. The completion period is for all items of Work in all
parts of Tender Documents and all such items required for the completion of the work
including extra and excess items. The Tenderer shall submit his Bar Chart and
Construction Methodology so as to complete the work in all respects in the period of
completion specified in the Tender Notice. The project planning shall be submitted in
PRIMAVERA format/ Microsoft Projects.
14.0 SCHEDULE OF RATES AND QUANTITIES:-
14.1 The tender has been drafted on the basis of pre-priced schedule of rates and quantities for
different types of items.
14.2 All the tender items are priced as mentioned in Schedule ‘B’
14.3 The contractors are expected to work out their own rates based on the detailed description
of Schedule ‘B’ items, the specifications, drawings & conditions and finally arrive at the
cost of work in appropriate places. The contractor shall insert percentage cost over or
below the N.M.M.C. ’s cost to arrive at the contract value for the work in Schedule ‘B’.
14.4 In case of lump sum contract, the Tenderer should insert his Lump Sum cost as contract
value for the work in Schedule ‘B’.
15.0 INSPECTION OF SITE AND SUFFICIENCY OF TENDER:- 15.1 The Tenderer is expected to work out their own rates based on the detailed description of
items, the specifications, drawings and conditions and finally arrive at the cost of the
Work/Service in the appropriate place. The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied
itself before tendering as to correctness and sufficiency of its Tender. The rates and prices
quoted shall, except as otherwise provided, cover all its obligations under the contract
and all matters and things necessary for proper completion and maintenance of the
Works/Services.
15.2 Where necessary, before submitting its Commercial Bid the Tenderer should inspect and
examine the site and its surroundings and shall satisfy itself about form and nature of the
Site, the quantities and nature of the Work/Service and materials necessary for the
completion of the Works/Services, means of access to the site, the accommodation it may
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 14 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
require, and in general, obtain all necessary information as to risk, contingencies and
other circumstances which may influence or affect its Tender.
15.3 No extra charges consequent on any misunderstanding or otherwise shall be allowed.
16.0 MANNER OF SUBMISSION OF TENDER:-
16.1 Tenders estimated cost below Rs. 3 lakhs will be submitted in the Tender box kept at E-
Tender cell, NMMC Head Office, ground floor, Plot No. 1, Govardhani Chowk, sec.
15A, CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai 400 614.
16.2 Telex, cable or facsimile offers will be rejected.
16.3 The Tenders Estimated cost above Rs. 3lakhs should be submitted online at
17.0 LAST DATE FOR SUBMISSION:- 17.1 Sealed Tenders shall be received at the address specified above not later than the time
and date specified in Schedule ‘A’ of the Tender.
17.2 In the event of the specified date for the submission of Tender offers being declared a
holiday, the offers will be received up to the appointed time on next working day.
17.3 The N.M.M.C. may, at its discretion, extend this deadline for submission of offers by
amending the Tender Documents, in which case all rights and obligations of the
N.M.M.C. and Tenderer will thereafter be subject to the deadline as extended.
17.4 Any Tender received by the N.M.M.C. after the deadline for submission of Tender
prescribed by the N.M.M.C., pursuant to the clause above, will be rejected and / or
returned unopened to the Tenderer.
18.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF OFFERS:- The Tenderer may modify or withdraw his Tender after its submission, provided that
written notice of the modification or withdrawal is received by the N.M.M.C. Prior to
the closing date and time prescribed for submission of Tender. No Tender can be
modified by the Tenderer, subsequent to the closing date and time for submission of
Tender.
19.0 CONTENTS:-
19.1 Tenders are invited in two-envelope system. Both the envelopes shall be placed in
another envelope which shall be sealed and submitted super scribing the name of Work &
C.A. No. mentioned in the Tender Notice.
19.2 Full name and address of the Tenderer shall be written in the bottom left corner of each
envelope.
19.3 The envelopes shall contain the following :
Envelope No.-1. This should contain all the documents mentioned below. This Envelope may contain
other documents also such as special conditions of tenders, Technical bids, drawings, etc
as mentioned in the Tender’s Schedule- A.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 15 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
i) This should contain all the documents mentioned as below from ‘a’ to ‘o’. This envelope may contain other documents also such as Technical bids, drawings, any other as mentioned in the Tender notice.
a) List of all the documents enclosed in the envelope. b) The scan copy of Tender form fee receipt or Demand draft/Pay Order (where it is
downloaded from the official website). c) Undertaking in Annexure 2 duly signed by a person holding valid power of attorney d) Power of Attorney of authorized person to sign the Tender Document (clause20e) e) For tender less than 3 Lakhs, EMD in the form of Demand draft/ Pay Order/ Bank
Guarantee (as per clause 6.0 above) & For tender above than 3 Lakhs, EMD in the form of Net Banking/any banks credit or debit card/ Bank Guarantee.
f) Attested copy of the valid registration certificate (as requested by the eligibility condition at Annexure ‘A’.
g) Up-to-date valid Clearance Certificates for Income Tax, Sales Tax, VAT, NMMC LBT registration/NOC, Service Tax.
h) Details of Company / firms in annexure - 3. i) The tenderer shall furnish a statement showing the type and magnitude of work done
in the last 3 years as per Annexure -4. j) List of work in Hand as on the date of submission of this tender in annexure -5 k) List of work tendered as on the date of submission of this tender in annexure-6 l) List of relevant plant & machinery in annexure -7. m) Details of Technical personnel available with the contractor in annexure -8. n) Affidavit on a Non-Judicial Stamp paper of Rs. 100/- (annexure 9) o) Bank Solvency from Nationalized / Scheduled Bank
Envelope No.:-2 (Financial Tender) - This envelope shall contain the complete set of Tender document along with the corrigendum, addendum if any issued duly filled in and initialed on each page and signed by the tenderer(s) at prescribed places of the Tender Documents including signature of witness (Unconditional). The financial bid in Schedule – B should be written both in figure & words at appropriate places.
Covering Envelope:- Both the envelopes 1 & 2 shall be put together in common sealed envelope subscribing on it, name of Work, Tender Notice NO., C.A. No., Name and address of the Tenderer. 20.0 IMPORTANT POINTS TO BE NOTED BY THE TENDERER:- a) On receipt of blank Tender form the Tenderer should ensure that no corrections or
over writings or erasures are left to be attested by the competent authority of the N.M.M.C.
b) The Financial Tender shall be inclusive of all taxes, Octroi, Local taxes, etc. complete as applicable and shall be borne by the Tenderer for the Work and claim for extra payment on any such account shall not be entertained. Any change that will be made in the Tender paper by the competent authority after issue of the Tender will be intimated to the Tenderer in the form of Corrigendum/ Addendum for incorporating the same in the Tender before submitting the Tender
c) Price – bid should be written both in words and figures, at appropriate places. d) No alterations and additions anywhere in the Tender Document are permitted. If any of
these are found, the Tender may be summarily rejected. The tenderer should get his doubts cleared during the pre-bid meeting only if provided in the tender. In case nopre-bid meeting is to be held the tenderer should seek clarification on any doubt in writing 7 days before the last date for receipt of Tenders.
e) In case of firm, each partner or power of attorney holder shall sign the Tender and the signatures shall be attested as witness by a reputed person in the space provided for the purpose. The attested copies of power of attorney of person signing the Tender shall be enclosed with the Tender. The power of attorney shall be signed by all partners. In
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 16 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
case of private limited/public limited companies, the power of attorney shall be supported
by Board resolutions and appropriate and adequate evidence in support of the same shall
be provided.
f) All pages and pasted slips should be signed by the Tenderer and corrections, if any must
be signed.
g) No page shall be added or removed from the set of Tender Document.
h) Tenderer shall be deemed to have studied the scope of Works / Items / Quantities / Rates,
all plans, specifications, terms and conditions, shall inspect and examine the site and
its surrounding and shall satisfy himself before submitting his Tender as to the nature of
the ground and subsoil (so far as is practicable), the form and nature of the site, nature of
the Work and materials necessary for the completion of the Works and means of access
to the site, the accommodation he may require and in general shall himself obtain all
necessary information as to risk, contingencies, obligations under the Contract and all
matter and things necessary for proper completion and maintenance of the Works. No
extra charges consequent on any misunderstanding or otherwise shall be allowed. A
declaration and an undertaking to this effect should be signed by the Tenderer in the form
attached at Annexure-15
i) The Tenderer shall submit the Tender which satisfies each and every condition laid down
in this Tender notice, failing which the Tender will be liable to be rejected. Conditional
Tenders will be rejected.
21.0 CORRUPT OR FRAUDULENT PRACTICES:- 21.1 The N.M.M.C. requires that the Tenderers under this Tender observe the highest
standards of ethics during the procurement and execution of such contracts. In pursuance
of this policy, the N.M.M.C. defines for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth
as follows:
a) “Corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting of anything of
value to influence the action of the public official in the procurement process or in
contract execution; and
b) “Fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a
procurement process or an execution of a contract to the detriment of the N.M.M.C., and
includes collusive practice among Tenderers (prior to or after Tender submission)
designed to establish Tender prices at artificial non-competitive levels and to deprive the
N.M.M.C. of the benefits of free and open competition
21.2 The N.M.M.C. will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Tenderer
recommended for award has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for
the contract in question; The N.M.M.C. will deem a firm ineligible, either indefinitely or
for a stated period of time, to be awarded a contract if it at any time determines that the
firm has engaged in corrupt and fraudulent practices in competing for, or in executing, a
contract.
22.0 MANNER OF OPENING OF TENDER:-
For the work of Rs. 3 lakhs below, the tender received within the schedule time & date
specified in the tender notice will be opened as per the specified programme in the office
as mentioned in the tender notice (if possible). The Tenders will be opened in the
presence of Tenderers or their authorized representatives who choose to remain present
on the opening day at the scheduled time.
The envelop no. 1 will be opened first and eligibility of each bidder will be scrutinized.
Those bidder found to be eligible as per criteria given in chapter 4 will be conveyed for
opening of financial bid i.e. envelop no.2.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 17 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
For the works of Rs. 3 lakhs above tender will be opened on line in the presence of tender
committee & e-tendering administrator.
23.0 PROCESS TO BE CONFIDENTIAL:- Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of
Tenders and the award of a Contract shall not be disclosed to Tenderers or any other
person not officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful
Tenderer has been announced.
24.0 PRELIMINARY SCRUTINY:- The N.M.M.C. will scrutinize the offers to determine whether they are complete, whether
any errors have been made, whether required technical documentation have been
furnished, whether the documents have been properly signed, and whether the offers are
generally in order. Prior to detailed evaluation the N.M.M.C. will determine the
substantial responsiveness of each offer to the Tender Documents. For purposes of these
Clauses, a substantially responsive Tender is one that confirms to all the terms and
conditions of the Tender Documents without material deviations. The N.M.M.C.
determination of Tenderer’s responsiveness is to be based on the contents of the Tender
offer itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence.
A Tender determined as not substantially responsive will be rejected by the N.M.M.C.
and may not subsequently be made responsive by the Tenderer by correction of the non-
conformity.
The N.M.M.C. may waive any minor infirmity or irregularity in a Tender, which does not
constitute a material deviation. This shall be binding on all Tenderers and the N.M.M.C.
reserves the right of such waivers.
25.0 CLARIFICATION OF OFFERS:-
To assist in the scrutiny, evaluation and comparison of Tenders, the N.M.M.C. May, at
its discretion, ask some or all Tenderers for technical clarification of their Tender. The
request for such clarifications and the response shall be in writing. To speed up the
Tender process, the N.M.M.C., at its discretion, may ask for any technical clarification to
be submitted by means of facsimile by the Tenderer. In such cases, original copy of the
document describing the technical clarifications must be sent to the N.M.M.C. by means
of courier / in person
26.0 REJECTION OF TENDERS:- The Tenders are liable to be rejected if the Tenderer:
Does not submit the price of the tender in the form of original cash receipt/ DD/ pay
order.
• Does not submit EMD.
• Does not submit undertaking on Rs. 100/- stamp paper. (Annexure - 2)
• Does not disclose the full names and address of all his partners in case of a
Partnership Concern;
• Does not submit the information as called for in Annexure – (3 to 8)
• Does not submit affidavit on Rs. 100/- Stamp Paper. (Annexure - 9)
• Fails to initial corrections;
• Fails to fill completely all the proforma provided in the Tender including proforma of
Submission of Tender and percentages and amount columns in Schedule – ‘B’.
• Tries to contact the N.M.M.C. on any matter relating to its Tender, or tries to
influence the N.M.M.C. in its decision on Tender evaluation, Tender comparison or
Contract award from the time of the Tender opening to the time of contract is
awarded.
• Stipulates any condition in the Tender;
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 18 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
• Stipulates the validity period less than what is stated in the form of Tender;
• Does not quote rates inclusive of all taxes, Octroi local taxes.
• Does not sign every page of Tender with seal of company / firm;
• Does not submit document for eligibility criteria mention in Schedule A.
27.0 SHORT – LISTING OF TENDERERS:-
The N.M.M.C. shall notify the date of opening of the commercial bid to all the Tenderers.
On such notified date Envelope No. 2 of all the Tenderers which fulfill the criteria as
mentioned in Para 17 above will be opened on the notified date and the amount quoted in
the tender document shall then be read out.
28.0 OPENING OF COMMERCIAL OFFICE:- The N.M.M.C. shall notify the date of opening of the commercial bids to all the
tenderers. On such notified date the envelope no. 2 will be opened and the rates in
schedule B or percentage above / below the estimate shall then be read out.
29.0 ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER:- 29.1 Acceptance of Tender on behalf of the N.M.M.C. shall be done by an officer(s) to whom
the powers are delegated by the Joint City Engineer.
29.2 The N.M.M.C. is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender. The N.M.M.C. reserves
the right to reject any or all Tenders received without assigning any reason whatsoever.
29.3 The right to split up the work in two or more parts is reserved by the N.M.M.C. and also
the right to award the work to more than one agency is reserved by the N.M.M.C.
30.0 INTIMATION TO SUCESSFUL TENDERER:-
The acceptance of Tender may be communicated to the successful Tenderer in writing or
otherwise either by the Tender opening Authority or any Authority in the N.M.M.C.
31.0 SECURITY DEPOSIT / PERFORMANCE SECURITY:- 31.1 Successful Tenderer shall pay a Security Deposit equal to the Amount indicated in the
Schedule A of the Detailed Tender Notice as security for due fulfillment of the contract,
within seven (7) days after receipt of intimation in writing of acceptance of Tender.
31.2 The mode of making this deposit is as under.
a) Initial Security Deposit: - A sum, which along with the Earnest Money as mentioned
in schedule ‘A’ the sum shall be paid within 15 days after receipt of intimation in the
writing of acceptance of Tender.
It is optional to the Tenderer to make the initial Security Deposit in any one of the
following ways:
i. wholly in cash; or
ii. wholly in form of National Saving Certificate pledged in favour of the N.M.M.C.
or bank guarantees/fixed deposit from Nationalized/Scheduled Banks in the
enclosed format or
iii. Partly in cash and partly in form of National Saving Certificate pledged in favour
of the N.M.M.C. or Bank guarantees/fixed deposit from Nationalized/ Scheduled
Banks in the enclosed format.
b) Retention Money:-
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 19 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The remaining amount of the Security Deposit (if applicable as per Schedule A) shall be
recovered from the Tenderer’s running bills at the rate of five (5) percent and such
retention together with the Initial Security Deposit made as aforesaid shall not exceed the
total amount of security deposit maintained as per the clause 26.1 after which such
retention will cease.
c) All compensation or other sums of money payable by the Contractor under the terms of
the contract or any other account whatever, may be deducted from or paid by the sale of a
sufficient part of the Security Deposit/ retention money or from the interest arising there
from any sums which may be due to many become due to contractor by the N.M.M.C. on
any account whatsoever and in the event of his security deposit/ retention money being
reduced by reason of any such deduction or sale aforesaid, the contractor shall within 15
days of receipt of notice or demand from the Joint City Engineer make good the deficit.
In the event of such deposit having been made by the Contractor by delivery of the
N.M.M.C. by the guarantee of the bankers of the contractor under any of the provisions
of the contract becoming subject to or liable for any penalty for causing damages
liquidated or unliquidated or of the said deposit becoming forfeited or any breach or
failure or determination of contract then and in such case the amount of any such penalty
or damage and the deposit so forfeited is not previously paid to the Municipal
Corporation under and in terms of the said guarantee.
32.0 STAMP DUTY, LEGAL AND STATUTORY CHARGES:- It shall be incumbent on the successful Tenderer to pay stamp duty for the Contract
agreement, as applicable on the date of the execution.
33.0 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENT:- 33.1 The successful Tenderer after furnishing Initial Security Deposit, is required to execute
an Agreement in duplicate in the form kept at Annexure-B of Volume-III of this Tender
Document on a stamp paper of proper value. The proper value at present is Rs.100/-. The
agreement should be signed within 15 days from the date of acceptance of the Tender.
The Contract will be governed by the Contract agreement, the General Conditions of the
Contract (G.C.C.), and the Special Conditions of the Contract and other documents as
specified in the C.O.C.
33.2 It shall be incumbent on the successful Tenderer to pay stamp duty for the Contract
Agreement, as applicable on the date of the execution.
34.0 LICENCES:- The successful Tenderer should comply statutory instructions of contract labour & will be
required to produce to the satisfaction of the Joint City Engineer a valid contract labour
license issued in his favour under the provision of the Contract Labour (Regulation and
Abolition) ACT 1970, before starting the Work. On failure to do so, the acceptance of
the Tender is liable to be withdrawn and also the Earnest Money is liable to be forfeited.
35.0 RIGHTS OF THE N.M.M.C.:- 35.1 The N.M.M.C. Reserves the right to suitably increase/ reduce the scope of work put to
this Tender. In case of a Rate Contract, the N.M.M.C. does not in any way guarantee the
quantity for which an order may be placed and the Tender quantity may only be treated as
indicative. The right to split up the Work in two or more parts is reserved by the
N.M.M.C. and also the right to award the Work to more than one agency is reserved by
the N.M.M.C.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 20 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
35.2 In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of any of the clauses in Tender Document
or the Contract Document, interpretation of the Clauses by the N.M.M.C. shall be final
and bindings on all Parties.
36.0 INTERPRETATION OF THE CLAUSES IN THE TENDER DOCUMENT /
CONTRACT DOCUMENT:- In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of any of the clauses in Tender Document
or the Contract Document, interpretation of the clauses by the N.M.M.C. shall be final
and binding on all parties.
37.0 NOTICE TO FORM PART OF CONTRACT:- Notice of Tender and these instructions shall form part of the contract.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 21 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Annexure – 1
FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE BOND 1. In consideration of the Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation (hereinafter called ‘NMMC’)
having agreed to exempt _____________________________ (hereinafter called “the said
Operator / Contractor / Tenderer / Supplier (s)’) form ___________________________ for
(hereinafter called “the said Agreement”) of security deposit for the due fulfillment by the
said Tenderer as per the terms and conditions contained in the said Agreement, and on
production of a Bank Guarantee for Rs.___________ (rupees
_____________________________ only). We, (indicate the name of bank)
__________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as ‘the bank’) at the
request of ______________________ the Operator / Contractor / Tenderer / Supplier (s) do
hereby undertake to pay the NMMC an amount not exceeding Rs.
___________________________________ against any loss or demand caused to or suffered
or would be caused to or suffered by the NMMC by reason of any breach by the said
Operator / Contractor / Tenderer / Supplier (s) of any of the terms or conditions contained in
the said agreement.
2. We_________________________ do hereby undertakes to pay the (indicate the name of the
bank) amounts due and payable under the guarantee without any demur, merely on a demand
from the NMMC stating that the amount claimed is due by way of loss or damage caused to
or would be caused to or suffered by the NMMC by reason of breach by the said Operator /
Contractor / Tenderer / Supplier (s) of any of the terms or conditions contained in the said
Agreement or by reasons of the Operator / Contractor / Tenderer / Supplier (s) failure to
perform the said Agreement. Any such demand made on the bank shall be conclusive as
regards the amount due and payable by the Bank under this guarantee. However, our liability
under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount not exceeding Rs.__________
with contract labour act 1970 (Regulation and Abolition).
(g) Water: Provision of all water required including temporary
plumbing and connection.
(h) Temporary Work Shops, Stores, Offices, Labour Camps etc.
Provisions of such structures required for efficient execution of
the Works and removing and cleaning up site on completion of
Works.
(i) Precautions Against Risks: Precautions to prevent loss or damage
from all or any risk, insurance of sheds or any temporary
accommodation provided by the N.M.M.C watching and
lighting, provisions pertaining to the General Conditions of
Contract.
(j) Notices, Fees etc.: Compliance with statutory provisions of
regulations and/ or bye laws of any local authority and/ or any
public service company or authority affected by the Works.
(k) Setting the Works including all apparatus required.
(l) Site Drainage: Removal of all water that may accumulate due to
spring, sub soil water, flood/tides and any other causes on the
site during the progress of the Work.
(m) Execution of Work in Workmanlike manner, facilities for
inspection etc.
(n) Rectification of bad Work: Rectification and/ or removal and
reconstruction of any Work which (as decided by the Engineer)
has been executed with unsound or imperfect materials or
unskilled Workmanship or of a quality inferior to that contracted
for, whether during construction or reconstruction prior to the
expiry of the Defect Liability period.
(o) Responsibility for damages and loss of all construction materials
etc., at the site until handing over to the N.M.M.C.
(p) Removal of Rubbish: Removal of Rubbish & debris & cleaning
of any dirt before handing over all completion of woks.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 65 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
(q) Cleaning site and Works: Removal by the Contractor off the site,
of any tools, plats & materials and sweeping building, washing
floors, cleaning joineries & removal of splashes of asphalt
leaving the whole site neat and tidy.
(r) Completion: Completing the Work to the satisfaction of the
Engineer on or before stipulated the date of completion.
(s) Difficult position: Accessibility or otherwise to site, easy or
difficult position in Works.
(t) Errors: Rectification of all defects during construction & defect
liability period to the satisfaction of Engineer.
(u) Curved Works etc. Works of any quantity, size or shape whether
level, inclined, curved, battered etc.
(v) Maker’s Instruction: Compliance with make’s instructions in the
case of proprietary articles, factory made good of precast items.
(w)Waste: All waste laps, seams, joints (rough or fair cutting)
straight/ raking, circular and making good.
(x) Artificial Lights: To include all lighting/Kerosene or electric
power as the case may be when need arises for use of lighting
while carrying out Works.
Construction of approaches to the site of Work. Making
arrangements for proper access to Works in the form of stairs,
ladders, lifts etc. as ordered by the Engineer – in – Charge for
proper supervisions, testing and or inspection of Works
including material during construction & defect liability period. 95 . Interim Payment Interim bills shall be submitted by the Contractor from time to time
(but at an interval of not less than one month) for the Works
executed. The Engineer shall arrange to have the bills verified by
taking or causing to be taken, where necessary, the requisite
measurement of Work. The joint measurement shall not be an excuse
for the Contractor to submit intermediate bills at monthly or intervals
not less than a month. All interim bills shall be first submitted by the
Contractor with detailed measurements and thereafter only the
Engineer or his organisation representative shall carry out joint
verifications or otherwise on record in the measurement book before
certification of the bills.
Payment on account for amount admissible shall be made on the
Engineer certifying the sum to which the Contractor is considered
entitled by way of interim payment for all the Work executed, after
deducting there from the amount already paid, the security
deposit/retention money and such other amounts as may be
deductible or recoverable in terms of the contract.
No interim payment will be admitted until such time the Contractor
have fully complied with the requirement of the Condition 84
concerning submission and approval of Network Schedule for the
Works, as detailed in Condition 83. A fixed sum shall be held
in abeyance at the time of next interim payment for non attainment
of each milestone in the Network and shall be released only on
attainment of the said milestone 96 . Modification of
Interim Certificate.
An interim certificate given relating to Work done or material
delivered may be modified or corrected by any subsequent interim
certificate or by the final certificate. No certificate of the Engineer
supporting an interim payment shall of itself be conclusive evidence
that any Work or materials to which it relates is/are in accordance
with the contract.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 66 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
97 . Income Tax
The Contractor shall pay Indian Income Tax on all payments made
to him under the Contract, other than reimbursements made to him
by the N.M.M.C to cover payment by Contractor of minor custom
duties etc., or any other payment which the Contractor may make on
the N.M.M.C’s behalf. Under the provisions of Sec. 194-C of the
Indian Income Tax Act, the N.M.M.C is required to deduct Tax with
surcharge at source at prevailing rates from the gross amount of each
bill submitted. Any expatriate site staff or staff not normally
residents of India, employed by the Contractor shall pay personal
Income Tax on all money earned and paid in India. The Contractor
shall perform such duties in regard to such deductions thereof as
may be imposed on him by such laws and regulations.
98 . Payment of Taxes The contractor shall pay all the taxes directly to respective
organizations & to the Government. The N.M.M.C shall not take any
responsibility for any kind of tax payment to the Government or
semi Government bodies at any point of time.
The prices quoted by the Contractor shall include all customs duties,
import duties, excise duties, business taxes, income and other taxes
that may be levied in accordance to the laws and regulation in-force
on the Contractor’s Equipment, materials, supplies (permanent,
temporary and consumables) to be used on or furnished under the
contract and on the services to be performed under the contract.
Nothing in the contract shall relieve the contractor from his
responsibility to pay any tax that may be levied or on profits made
by him in respect of the contract.
The contractor shall perform such duties in regard to such deductions
thereof as may be imposed on him by such laws and regulations.
All c Charges on account of Octroi, terminal or Sales Tax and other
duties on material obtained for the Works from any source including
the tax applicable as per Maharashtra Sales Tax Act on the transfer
of property in the goods involved in the execution of Works contract
(re-enacted) Act, 1991 etc. shall be borne by the Contractor. Under
the provisions of the Maharashtra Sales Tax Act, the N.M.M.C is
required to deduct Turnover Tax at source at the rates prevailing at
the time of payments.
The contractor shall submit form – 31 or such other forms as are
prescribed under the said act which is required to be produced by the
principle employer in the events of any notice by the Sales Tax
Department within one month of issue of letter of acceptance.
99 . Deduction of
Contract Sales Tax
/ Turnover tax.
The Contractors are required to produce their registration for
contract sales tax/turnover tax to the department before releasing the
1st R.A. bill for the Work executed by them, failing which, no
payment shall be release.
100. Provisional
Sums.
(1)”Provisional sum” means a sum included in the contract and so
designated in the Bill of Quantities for the execution of Work or
supply of goods, materials or services or for contingencies,
which sum may be used, in whole or in part, or not at all, at the
direction and discretion of the Engineer. The contract price shall
include only such amounts in respect of the Work, supply or
service to which such provisional sum relate as the Engineer
shall approve or determine in accordance with this clause.
(2) In respect of every provisional sum the Engineer shall have
power to order to execute the Work, including goods, materials
or services to be supplied by the Contractor. The contract price
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 67 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
shall include the value of such Work executed or such goods,
material or services supplied determined in accordance with
Clause No. 102.
(3) The Contractor shall produce all quotations, invoices, vouchers
and accounts or receipts in connection with expenditure in
respect of provisional sums. 101. Rates for Excess in
Items.
Quantities shown in the tender are approximate and no claim shall be
entertained for quantities of work executed being either more or less
than those entered in the tender or estimate. For purpose of this
contract, the variations/deviations in carrying out the items of work
shall not exceed plus or minus 25 percent of contract sum. The
deviation/variation in the quantity of individual items shall not be
taken as deviation or variation in the contract. The difference
between the total value of the work done and the Contract sum as
defined above will be only be considered for deviation/variation.
The Contractor shall arrive at the rates after carefully preparing the
rate analysis taking into consideration site conditions. For increase
up to 25 percent over the quantity shown in the bill of quantities
shall be paid at, the rate mentioned in the bill of quantities. However,
if the quantity increases beyond 25 percent of quantity shown in the
bill of quantities the excess quantity beyond 25 percent shall be
priced as under:
The rate shall be worked out based on schedule rate with
Contractor`s quoted percentage or current district schedule of rates
without Contractor`s quoted percentage, which ever is less. 102.
Rates for Extra
Items.
Rates for such additional altered or, substituted Work shall be
determined as follows:
i) If rate for additional, altered or substituted item of Work is
specified in the bill of quantities and rates, the Contractor shall
carry out the additional, altered or substituted item at the same
rate, subject to 100 above.
ii) If rate for any additional, altered or substituted item of Work is
not included in the bill of quantities and rates, such item of Work
shall be carried out at the relevant N.M.M.C’s schedule of rates
(Public works Department and M.J.P. schedule of rates for Thane
District) prevailing at the time of execution of extra Work
(Quoted percentage will not be applicable)
iii) If the rate for any additional, altered or substituted item of
Work cannot be determined in the manner specified in (i) & (ii)
above, or the rate so determined is found to be unreasonable,
then the Contractor will be paid at such fair and reasonable rates
as Worked out by the Engineer on the basis of material, labour
and operations of construction equipment required to execute the
item and allowing 10 percent to cover profits and overhead
charges.
iv) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his detailed rate
analysis for carrying out variation duly supported with quotations
and other supporting documents within 7 days of written
instructions to carry out variations. If the Contractor’s quotation
is unreasonable, the Engineer orders the variation and makes
change to the contract price which is based on his own forecast
of the variations on the Contractor’s cost. In case, the rates
decided by the Engineer are not acceptable to the Contractor, he
shall continue with the work and maintain contemporary records
of actual expenses on day-to-day basis with joint assessment/
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 68 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
verification. The Contractor is not entitle for payment of actual
expenses as per joint records added with 10% for profit and
overheads. Disagreement with the rate fixed by the Engineer
shall be informed by the Contractor before commencing the
work of variations, failing which the rate fixed by the Engineer
shall be final and binding on the parties to contract. 103. Overpayment and
Underpayment
Whenever any claim for the payment of a sum to the N.M.M.C rises
out of or under this contract against the Contractor the
same may be deducted by the N.M.M.C from any sum then due or
which at any time thereafter may become due to the Contractor
under this contract and failing that under any contract with the
N.M.M.C or from any other sum due to the Contractor from the
N.M.M.C (which may be available with the N.M.M.C) or from his
security deposit/retention money, or he shall pay the claim on
demand.
The N.M.M.C reserves the right to carry out post payment audit
and technical examination of the final bill including all
supporting voucher, abstracts etc. The N.M.M.C further reserves the
right to enforce recovery of any over payment when detected.
If as a result of such audit and technical examination any
overpayment is discovered in respect of any Work done by the
Contractor or alleged to have been done by him under the
Contract, it shall be recovered by the N.M.M.C from the Contractor
by any or all of the methods prescribed above or if underpayment is
discovered the amount shall be duly paid to the Contractor by the
N.M.M.C.
Provided that the aforesaid right of the N.M.M.C to adjust
overpayment against amount due to the Contractor under any other
contract with N.M.M.C shall not extend beyond the period of two
years from the date of payment of the final bill or in case the final
bill is a “Minus” bill, from the date of the amount payable by the
Contractor under the “Minus” bill is communicated to the
Contractor.
Any amount due to the Contractor under this contract for
underpayment may be adjusted against amount then due or which
may at any time thereafter become due before payment is to the
Contractor, from him to N.M.M.C on any other contract or account
whatsoever. 104. Payment of Final
Bill
Final joint measurement along-with the representatives of the
Contractor should be taken, recorded and signed by the Contractors.
Contractor should submit the final bill within 1 month of physical
completion of the Work.
If the Contractor fails to submit the final bill within 1 month, the
N.M.M.C staff will prepare the final bill based on the joint
measurement within next 3 months.
Engineer’s decision shall be final in respect of claims for defect and
pending claims against Contractors.
No further claims should be made by the Contractor after submission
of the final bill and these shall be deemed to have been waived and
extinguished. Payment of those items of the bills in respect of which
there is no dispute and of items in dispute, for quantities and rates as
approved by the Commissioner shall be made within a reasonable
period as may be necessary for the purpose of verification etc.
After payment of the final bill as aforesaid has been made, the
Contractor may, if he so desires, reconsider his position in respect of
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 69 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
a disputed portion of the final bill and if he fails to do so within 84
days, his disputed claim shall be dealt with as provided in the
contract. 105 Receipts to be
Signed in Firm’s
Name by any One
of the Partners
Every receipt for money which may become payable or for any
security which may become transferable to the Contractor under
these present shall, if signed in the partnership name by any one of
the partners, be a good and sufficient discharge to the Commissioner
and N.M.M.C in respect of the money or security purporting to be
acknowledged thereby, and in the event of death of any of the
partners during the pendency of this contract, it is hereby expressly
agreed that every receipt by any one of the surviving partners shall,
if so signed as aforesaid, be good and sufficient discharge as
aforesaid provided that nothing in this clause contained shall be
deemed to prejudice or effect any claim which the Commissioner or
the N.M.M.C may hereafter have against the legal representatives of
any partners so dying or in respect of any breach of any of the
conditions thereof, provided also that nothing in this clause
contained shall be deemed prejudice or affect the respective rights or
obligations of the Contractor and of the legal representative of any
deceased Contractors interest.
106. Price Variation
Clause
Price Variation Clause shall be applicable as per condition of
Contract as attached.
PART-VI TERMINATION OF CONTRACT AND SETTELEMENT OF DISPUTES
107. Cancellation of
Contract in Full or
in Part.
If the Contractor:
(a) At any time makes default in proceeding with the Work with due
diligence and continues to do so after notice in writing of
fourteen days from the Engineer; or
(b) Commits default in complying with any of the terms and
conditions of contract and does not remedy it within fourteen
days after a notice in writing is given to him in that behalf by the
Engineer, or
(c) Fails to complete the Works or items with individual dates of
completion, on or before the date(s) of completion, and does not
complete them within the period specified in a notice given in
writing in that behalf by the Engineer, or
(d) Shall offer or give or agree to give to any person in N.M.M.C’s
Service or to any other person on his behalf any gift or
consideration of any kind as an inducement or reward for doing
or forbearing to do or for having done or forborne to do any act
in relation to the obtaining or execution of this or any
other contract for the N.M.M.C, or
(e) Shall obtain a contract with the N.M.M.C as a result of ring
tendering or other non-bona-fide methods of competitive
tendering or
(f) being an individual or a firm, any partner thereof, shall at
any time be adjudged insolvent or have a receiving order or order
for administration of his estate made against him or shall take any
proceedings for liquidation or composition (other than
voluntary liquidation for the purpose of amalgamation or
reconstruction) under any insolvency act for the time being in
force or make any conveyance of assignment of his effects or
composition or arrangement for the benefit of his creditors or
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 70 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
purport so to do, or if any application be made under any
Insolvency Act for the time being in force for the sequestration
of his estate or if a trust deed be executed by him for his
creditors, or
(g) Being a company, shall pass a resolution or the court shall make
an order for the liquidation of his affairs, or a receiver or a
manager on behalf of the debenture holders shall be appointed
or circumstances shall arise which entitle the Court or
debenture holders to appoint a receiver or a Manager, or
(h) shall suffer an execution being levied on his goods and allow it to
be continued for a period of 21 days, or
Assigns, transfers, sublets (engagement of labour on a piece
Work basis or labour with materials not to be incorporated in the
Work, shall not be deemed to be sub-letting) or attempts to
assign, transfer or sub-let the entire Works or any portion
thereof without the prior written approval of the Commissioner;
the Commissioner may, without prejudice to any other right or
remedy which shall have accrued or shall accrue thereafter to the
N.M.M.C by written notice cancel the contract as a whole or
only such items of Work in default from the contract.
(i) In the case of abandonment of the work owing to serious illness
or death of the Contractor.
108. Action When
Whole of Security
Deposit is to be
Forfeited
In the cases mentioned in above clause No. 107 the Engineer, on
behalf of the N.M.M.C shall have power to adopt any of the
following forces, as he may deem best suited to the interest of the
N.M.M.C.
(a) To rescind the contract (for which rescission notice in writing to
the Contractor under the head of Engineer shall be conclusive
evidence) and in that case the security deposit of the Contractor
shall stand forfeited and be absolutely at the disposal of
N.M.M.C
(b) To carry out Work or any part of the departmentally debiting the
Contractor with the cost of the Work, expenditure incurred on
tools and plan and charges on additional supervisory staff
including the cost of Work charge establishment employed for
getting the unexecuted part of the Work completed and crediting
him with the value of the Work done departmentally in all
respects in the same manner and at the same rates as if it had
been carried out by the Contractor under the terms of his
contract. The certificate of the Engineer as to the costs and other
allied expenses so incurred and as to the value of the Work so
done departmentally and shall be final and conclusive against the
Contractor.
(c) To order that the Work of the Contractor be measured up and to
take such part there of as shall be on executed out of his hands,
and to give it to another Contractor to complete, in which case all
expenses incurred on advertisement for fixing a new contracting
agency, additional supervisory staff including the cost of Work
charge establishment and a cost of Work executed by the new
contract agency will be debited to the Contractor and the value of
the Work done or executed through a new Contractor shall be
credited to the Contractor in all respects and in the same manner
and at the same rates as if it had been carried out by the
Contractor under the terms of this contract. The certificate of the
Engineer as to all the cost of the Work and other expenses
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 71 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
incurred as aforesaid for or in getting the unexecuted Work done
by the new Contractor and as to the value of the Work so done
shall be final and conclusive against the Contractor.
In case the contract shall be rescinded under clause (a) above the
Contractor shall not be entitle to recover or be paid, any sum for
any Work therefore actually performed by him under this
contract unless and until the Engineer shall have certified in
writing the performance of the such Work and the amount
payable to him in respect thereof and he shall only be entitled to
be paid the amount so certified in the event of either of the curses
referred to in clauses (b) or (c) being adopted and the cost of the
executed departmentally or through a new Contractor and other
allied expenses exceeding the value of the such Work credited to
the Contractor the amount of excess shall be deducted from any
money due to the Contractor, by N.M.M.C under the Contractor
otherwise howsoever or from his security deposit or the sale
proceeds there of provided, however, that Contractor shall have
no claim against N.M.M.C even if the certified value of Work
done departmentally or through a new Contractor exceed the
certified cost of such Work and allied expenses, provided always
that which ever of the three courses mentioned in clauses (a), (b)
or (c) is adopted by the Engineer, the Contractor shall have no
claim to compensation for any loss sustained by him by reason
his having purchased or procured any materials, or entered into
any engagements, or made any advance on account of or with a
view to the execution of the Work or the performance of the
contract. 109.
Action When the
Progress of any
Particular Portion
of the Work is
Unsatisfactory
If the progress of any particular portion of the Work is unsatisfactory
the conditions mentioned in clause 108(b), be entitled to lake action
under clause after giving the Contractor 14 days notice in writing.
The Contractor will have no claim for compensation, for any loss
sustained by him owing to such action.
110. Contractor
Remains Liable to
Pay Compensation
if Action not Taken
Under Clause 108
and 109
In any case in which any of the powers conferred upon the Engineer
by clauses 108 & 109 hereof shall have become exercisable and the
same shall not have been exercised the non exercise there of shall
not constitute a waver of any of the conditions thereof and such
powers shall not withstanding the excisable in the event of any
future case of default by the Contractor for which under any clause
hereof he is declared liable to pay compensation amounting to the
whole of this security deposit and the liability of the Contractor for
past and future compensation shall remain unaffected.
111. Power to take
possession of or
require removal or
sell Contractors
plant.
In the event of Engineer taking action under sub clauses (a) or (c)
clause 108, he may if he so desires, take possession of all any tools
and plant, materials and store in or upon the Work of the site thereof
or belonging to the Contractor, or procured by him and intended to
be uses for the execution of the Work or any part thereof paying or
allowing for the same in account at the contract rates or in the case
of contract rates not being applicable at current market rates to be
certified by the Engineer whose certificate thereof shall be final. In
the alternative the Engineer may after giving notice in writing to the
Contractor or his clerk of the Work foreman or other authorises
agent requires him to remove such tools and plant, material, or stores
from the premises within a time to be specified in such notice and in
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 72 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
the event of the Contractor failing to comply with any such
requisition, the Engineer may remove them at the Contractor’s
expenses or sell them by auctions or private sale on account of the
Contractor and at this risk in all respect and the certificate of the
Engineer as to the expenses of any such removal and the amount of
the proceeds and expensed on any such sale shall be final and
conclusive against the Contractor.
112. No Interest for
Delayed Payments
Due to Disputes
etc.
It is agreed that the N.M.M.C of or its Engineer or Officer shall not
be liable to pay any interest or damage with respect to any moneys or
balance which may be in its or its Engineer’s or officer’s hands
owing to any dispute or difference or claim or mis-understanding
between the N.M.M.C of or its Engineer or Officer on the one hand
and the Contractor on the other, or with respect to any delay on the
part of the N.M.M.C of Navi Mumbai or its Engineer or Officers in
making periodical or final payments or in any other respect
whatever. Payment to the Contractor of the amount due under each
of the interim payment certificate issued by the Engineer shall be
made by the N.M.M.C within 45 (Forty Five) days if such certificate
being delivered. If the N.M.M.C makes late payment, the Contractor
is to be paid interest on the late payment in the next payment.
Interest shall be calculated from the date by which the payment
should have been made up to the date when the late payment is made
at 6% per annum. It is a term under this contract that payment of
interest in excess of 6% is barred on any amount payable to the
Contractor on any account.
It is distinctly understood and agreed between the parties hereto that
payment for Work already executed by the Contractor is not a
condition precedent under this contract for the execution of the
remaining Work.
113. Jurisdiction In case of any claim, dispute or difference arising in respect of a
contract, the cause of action thereof shall be deemed to have arisen
in Navi Mumbai and all legal proceedings in respect of any such
claim, dispute or difference shall be instituted in a competent court
in the City of Navi Mumbai only.
114. Finality of
Decision and Non-
Arbitrability
If a dispute/ disputes of any kind whatsoever arises between the
Contractor and Engineers representative the same shall be referred to
the Engineer for his decision with detailed justification. Such
reference shall be stated that it is inpersunce to this clause for review
and giving decisions by the Engineers. The Engineer shall give his
decision within 14 days of receipt of notice. If either party is not
satisfied with the decision of the Engineer or the Engineer fails to
give the decision within the period of 14 days from the date of
receipt of notice under this clause, such a dispute may be referred to
Arbitration as per Clause No. 115.
115. Arbitration Except where, otherwise provided for in this contract, all questions
and disputes relating to the meaning of instruction hear in before
mentioned or as to any other question, claim, right, matter of
handing whatsoever, if any arising out of or relating to this contract,
specification, estimates, Instructions, orders or these conditions or
otherwise concerning the works, or the execution or failure to
execute the same where arising during the progress of the work or
after completion or abandonment thereof of any matter directly or
indirectly connected with this agreement shall be referred to the sole
Arbitration of the Municipal Commissioner of Navi Mumbai
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 73 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Municipal Corporation, C.B.D., Navi Mumbai and if the Municipal
Commissioner is unable or unwilling to act as such, then the matter
in dispute shall be referred to sole Arbitration or such other person
appointed by the Municipal Commissioner who is willing to act as
such Arbitrator. In case, the Arbitrator so appointed is unable to act
for any reasons, the Municipal Commissioner in the event of such
inability shall appoint another person to act as Arbitrator in
accordance with the terms of the contract. Such person shall be
entitled to proceed with the reference from the state at which it was
left by his predecessors. It is also a term of this contract that no
person other than a person appointed by the Municipal
Commissioner as aforesaid should act as an Arbitrator.
As aforesaid the provisions of the arbitration and conciliation act
1996 or any statutory modification or Reinactment there of and the
rules made there under and for the time being in force shall apply to
the arbitration proceedings under this clause.
116. Laws Governing
The Contract–
This contract shall be governed by the Indian Laws for the time
being in force.
PART –VII WORK COMPLETION & DEFECT LIABILITY
117. Clearance of Site
on Completion
Upon the issue of any Taking over certificate the Contractor shall
clear away and remove from that part of the site to which such
Taking-over Certificate relates all Contractor’s equipment, surplus
materials, rubbish and temporary Works of every kind, and leave
such part of the site and Works clean and in a Workman like
condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If the Contractor does
not clear the site within 15 days all material will be confiscated and
no compensation shall be paid and the site will be cleared at risk and
cost of the Contractor.
118. Submissions of
Final Completion
Drawings.
On completion of the Work, the Contractors shall furnish free of cost
1 set of R.T.F. of final completion drawings and 6 bound sets of
copies of drawings, showing all the details checked and signed by
the Engineer within 2 months of completion of Works. The payment
of final bill shall be made to the Contractors after receipt of above
sets. In case the Contractor fails to submit the completion drawings,
a compensation at the rate of Rs.5000/- per drawing shall be
recovered from the final bills
119. Completion
Certificate
(1) As soon as Work is completed, the Contractor shall give
notice of such completion to the Engineer and within 28
(Twenty-eight) days of receipt of such notice the Engineer shall
inspect the Works and shall furnish the Contractor with a
certificate of completion indicating (a) the date of completion (b)
the defects to be rectified by the Contractor, and/or (c) items for
which payment shall be made at reduced rates.
When separate periods of completion have been specified for
items or groups of items, the Engineer shall issue separate
completion certificates for such items or groups of items. No
certificate of completion shall be issued, nor the Works be
considered to be complete till the Contractor shall have removed
from the premises on which the Works has been executed, all
scaffolding, sheds and surplus materials, except such as required
for rectification of defects, rubbish and all huts and sanitary
arrangements required for his Workers on the site in connection
with the execution of Works as shall have been erected by the
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 74 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Contractor or the Workmen and cleaned all dirt from all parts
of building(s) in, upon or about which the Work has been
executed or of which he may have had possession for
the purpose of execution thereof and cleaned floors, gutters and
drains, eased doors and sashes, oiled and fastenings, labeled the
keys clearly and handed them over to the Engineer or his
representative and made the whole premises fit for immediate
occupation or use to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If the
Contractor shall fail to comply with any of the requirements of
this Condition as aforesaid, on or before the date of completion
of Works, the Engineer may at the expense of the Contractor
fulfill such requirements and dispose of all the surplus material
and rubbish etc. as he thinks fit and the Contractor shall have no
claims in respect of any such material except for any sum
actually realised by the sale thereof less the cost of fulfilling the
requirements and any other amount that may be due from the
Contractor. If the expense of fulfilling such requirement is more
than the amount realises on such disposal as aforesaid, the
Contractor shall forthwith on demand pay such excess.
The Contractor`s notice of completion as aforesaid shall have to
accompanied with one set of tracings of final completion
drawings on RTF and six bound sets of copies of as built
drawings, failing which the notice shall be deemed to have not
been issued at all. (2) If at any time before completion of the
entire Work, items or groups of items for which separate periods
of completion have been specified, have been completed, the
Engineer with the consent of the Contractor takes possession of
any part or parts of the same (any such part or parts being
hereinafter in this condition referred to as "the relevant part")
then not- withstanding anything expressed or implied elsewhere
in this contract.
(a) Within 28days (Twenty-eight days) of date of completion of
such items or group of items or possession of the relevant part
the Engineer shall issue a completion certificate for the relevant
part provided the Contractor fulfills his obligation for the
relevant part as in sub-para (1) above
(b) The defects liability period in respect of such items and relevant
part shall be deemed to have commenced from the certified date
of completion of such items or relevant part as the case may be.
(c) For the purpose of ascertaining compensation for delay under
Clause No. 88 in respect of any period during which the Works
are not completed the relevant part shall be deemed to form a
separate item or group, with date of completion as given in the
contract or as extended under Clause No.80 and actual date of
completion as certified by the Engineer under this condition.
(2) If any part of the Work shall have been substantially completed
and shall have satisfactorily passed any final test that may be
prescribed under the contract, the Engineer may issue a
certificate of completion in respect of that part of the
Works before completion of the whole Works and upon the issue
of such certificates, the Contractors shall be deemed to have
undertaken to complete any outstanding Works in that part of the
Works during the period of maintenance.
120. Taking Over of
Work
N.M.M.C will take over the Work at any stage whenever required in
the interest of public by giving 10 days notice to the Contractor.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 75 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
121. Defects Liability
Period
The Contractor shall be responsible to make good and remedy at his
own expense within such period as may be stipulated by the
Engineer any defects which may develop or be noticed before the
expiry of the period mentioned in the Schedule `A' hereto from
certified date of completion and intimation of which has been sent to
the Contractor within 7 days of expiry of the said period by letter
sent by hand delivery or by registered post
122. Liability for
Defects or
Imperfections and
Rectification
Thereof
If it shall appear to the Engineer or to his representative at any time
during construction or reconstruction or during the defects‚ liability
period, that any Work has been executed with unsound, imperfect or
unskillful Workmanship or that any material or article provided by
the Contractor for execution of thereof the Work is unsound or of a
quality inferior to that contracted for, or otherwise, not in accordance
with the Contract, or that any defect, shrinkage or other faults have
appeared in the Work arising out of defective or improper materials
or Workmanship, the Contractor shall, upon receipt of notice in
writing in that behalf from the Engineer forthwith rectify or remove
or reconstruct the Work so specified in whole or part, as the case
may require or, as the case may be, and / or remove the materials or
articles so specified and provide other proper and suitable materials
or articles at his own expense notwithstanding that the same may
have been inadvertently passed, certified and paid for, and in the
event of his failing to do so within the period to be specified by the
Engineer in his notice aforesaid the Engineer may rectify or remove
and re-execute the Work and/or remove and replace with others the
materials or articles complained of, as the case may be, by other
means at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
In case of repairs and maintenance Work, splashes and droppings
from whitewashing, painting etc. shall be removed and surfaces
cleaned simultaneously with completion of these items of Work in
individual rooms, quarters or premises etc. where the Work is done,
without waiting for completion of all other items of Work in the
contract. In case the Contractor fails to comply with requirement of
this condition, the Engineer shall have the right to get the Work done
by other means at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
The Engineer shall give three days notice in writing to the
Contractor before taking such action.
The Engineer reserves the right to decide the rates and prices of the
Works as executed by other means at the risk and cost of the
Contractor.
The cost and expenses thereby incurred on the Works and also such
penalty as the Engineer may impose for such wrongful conduct of
the Contractor (which penalty, the Engineer shall be competent to
impose and against the imposition of which or the amount thereof by
the Engineer an appeal shall lie only to the Commissioner within
seven days of the order in that behalf of the Engineer and the
decisions of the Commissioner shall be final and binding upon the
Contractor) may be deducted from any money due or to become due
to the Contractor, under this or any other contract between the
Contractor and the N.M.M.C.
123. Maintenance The Contractor shall maintain the finished surface of the road for a
period as specified in Contract document, after the completion of
Work without any extra cost to N.M.M.C irrespective of the designs,
standards and specifications and actual traffic etc. The Contractor
shall get the potholes filled up with asphalt mix materials and keep
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 76 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
the road surface in good condition throughout the year. 5 percent
amount of the total Work done shall be with held from running
account bill for the period specified in the Contract document from
the date of completion of Work as maintenance charges of
maintaining and keeping the road in good condition. This 5 percent
amount withheld towards maintenance charges shall be allowed to be
replaced with Bank guarantee or other recognised forms at
intermediate stage, if so, desired in writing. This maintenance
charges shall be in addition to security deposit.
On completion of the Work in all respects, necessary certificates will
be issued by the Engineer and the defect liability period will be
counted from the date of issue of such certificates
All damages during execution shall be made good by the Contractor
at his cost. He will be responsible for any damage to the road surface
including B.T. surface in rainy season and during construction and
guaranteed maintenance period and no separate payment will be
made for resorting such damages.
Defective Work is liable to be rejected at any stage. The Contractor
on no account can refuse to rectify defects merely on reasons that
further Work has been carried out. No extra payments shall be made
for such rectification.
124. Defects Liability
Certificate
The Contract shall not be considered as completed until a Defects
Liability Certificate shall have been signed by the Engineer and
delivered to the Contractor, stating the date on which the Contractor
shall have completed his obligations to execute and complete the
Works and remedy any defects therein to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
The Defects Liability Certificate shall be given by the Engineer
within 28 days after the expiration of the latest such period, or as
soon thereafter as any Works instructed, pursuant to Clauses 121 and
have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, Provided
that the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate shall not be a
condition precedent to payment to the Contractor of the Retention
Money.
125. Unfulfilled
Obligations
Notwithstanding the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate the
Contractor and the N.M.M.C shall remain liable for the fulfillment
of any obligation incurred under the provisions of the Contract prior
to the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate is issued and, for the
purposes of determining the nature and extent of any such
obligation, the Contract shall be deemed to remain in force between
the parties to the Contract. Notwithstanding the issue of the Defects
Liability Certificate the Contractor and the N.M.M.C shall remain
liable for the fulfillment of any obligation incurred under the
provisions of the Contract prior to the issue of the Defects Liability
Certificate is issued and, for the purposes of determining the nature
and extent of any such obligation, the Contract shall be deemed to
remain in force between the parties to the Contract.
126. Refund of Security
Deposit
The amount of security deposit lodged by a Contractor shall be
refunded along with the payment of the final bill, or after the expiry
of the defect liability period whichever is later unless the Engineer is
of the opinion that in order to safeguard against defects and pending
claims against the Contractor it is necessary to retain more amount
retained as retention money.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 77 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
ANNEXURE ‘A’
(See Condition 24)
SAFETY PROVISIONS
1. Suitable scaffolds shall be provided for workmen for all that cannot safely be done from
the ground, or from solid construction except such short period work as can be done
safely from ladders when a ladder is used an extra majdoor shall be engaged or holding
the ladder and if the ladder is used for carrying materials as well, suitable footholds and
handholds shall be provided on the ladder and the ladder shall e given an inclination not
steeper than to 1/4 % horizontal and 1 vertical)
2. Scaffolding or staging more than 3.25 meters above the ground or floor, swung or
suspended from an overhead support or erected with stationary support, shall have a
guard rail properly attached, belted braced and other wise secured at least 1 meter high
above the floor or platform of such scaffolding or staging and extending along the entire
length of the outside and ends thereof with only such openings as may be necessary for
the delivery of materials. Such a scaffolding or staging shall be so fastened as to prevent
it from swaying from the building or structure.
3. Working platform, gangways, and stairways shall be so constructed that they do not sag
unduly or unequally, and if high of a platform or gangway or stairway is more than 3.25
meters above ground level or floor level, it shall be closely boarded, have adequate width
and be suitably fenced as described in 2 above.
4. Every opening in floor of a building or in a working platform shall be provided with
suitable means to prevent fall or persons or materials by providing suitable fencing or
railing with a minimum height of 1 meter.
5. Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other working
places. Every ladder shall be securely fixed. No portable single ladder shall be over 9
meter in length. Width between side rails in a rung ladder shall in no case be less than
30cm for ladder up to and including 3 meter in length. For longer ladders this with shall
be increased by at least 6mm for each additional 30 cm of length. Uniform step spacing
shall not exceed 30cm.
Adequate precaution shall be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment. No
materials on any of the sites shall be so stacked or places as to cause danger or
inconvenience to any person or the public. The Contractor shall provided all necessary
fencing and lights to protect public from accidents and shall be found to bear expenses of
defense of every suit, action or other proceeding at law that may be brought by any
person for injury sustained owing to neglect of the above precautions and to pay any
damages and costs which may be awarded in any such suit action or proceedings to any
such person or which may with the consent of the Contractor be paid to compromise any
claim by any such person.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 78 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Excavation and Trenching: All trenches, 1.5 meters or more in depth, shall at all times be
supplied with at least one ladder for each 30 meters in length or fraction thereof, ladder
shall be extended from bottom of trench to at least 1 meter above surface of the ground
sides of a trench which is 1.5 meters or more in depth shall be stepped ask to give
suitable slope, or securely held by timber bracing, so as to avoid the danger of sides
collapsing. Excavated material shall not be placed within 1.5 meters of edge of trench or
half or depth of trench, whichever is more. Cutting shall be done from top to bottom.
Under no circumstances shall undermining or under cutting be done.
6. Demolition : Before any demolition work is commenced and also during the process of the
work
a) All road and open areas adjacent to the work site shall either be closed or suitably
protected.
b) No electric cable or apparatus which is liable to be a source of danger over a cable or
apparatus used by operator shall remain electrically charged,
c) All practical steps shall be taken to prevent danger to persons employed, from risk of
fire or explosion, or flooding. No floor roof or other part of a building shall be so
overloaded with debris or materials as to render it unsafe.
7. All necessary personal safety equipment as considered adequate by the Engineer shall be
available for use of persons employed on the site and maintained in a condition suitable
for immediate use, and the Contractor shall take adequate steps to ensure proper use of
equipment by those concerned.
a) Workers employed on missing asphaltic materials, cement and lime
mortars/concrete shall be provided with protective footwear, hand gloves and
goggles
b) Those engaged in handling material which is injurious to eyes shall be provided
with protective goggles.
c) Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with welder’s protective eye-
shields.
d) Stone breakers shall be provided with protective goggles and protective clothing
and seated at sufficient safe intervals.
e) When workers are employed in sewers and manholes, which are in use, the
Contractor shall ensure that manhole covers are opened and manholes are
ventilated at least for an hour before workers are allowed to get into them.
Manholes so opened shall be cordoned off with suitable railing and provided with
warning, signals or boards to prevent accident to public.
f) The Contractor shall not employ men below the age of 18 and women on the
work of painting with products containing lead in any form. Whenever men above
the age of 18 are employed on the work of lead painting the flowing precautions
shall be taken.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 79 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
g) No paints containing lead or lead products shall be sued except in the form of
paste or readymade paint (i) suitable face masks shall be supplied for use by
workers when paint is applied in the form of spray or surface having lead paint
dry rubbed and scrapped, (ii) overalls shall be supplied by the Contractor to
workmen and adequate facilities shall be provided to enable working painters t
wash during and on cessation of work.
8. When work is done near any place where there is risk of drowning, all necessary
equipment shall be provided and kept ready for use ad all necessary steps taken for
prompt rescue of any person in danger and adequate provision made for prompt first aid
treatment of all injuries likely to be sustained during the course of the work.
9. Use of hoisting machines and tackle including their attachments, anchorage and supports
shall conform to the following:
(a) (i) These shall be of good mechanical construction, sound material and adequate
strength and free from patent defects and shall be kept in good repair and in good
working order,
(ii) Every rope used in hoisting or lowing materials or as a means of suspension
shall be of durable quantity and adequate strength, and free from patent
defects.
(b) Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly qualified and
no person under the age of 21 years shall be in charge of any hoisting machine
including any scaffold which or give signals to operator.
(c) In case of every hoisting machine and of every chain. Hook, shackle, swivel and
pulley block used in hoisting or lowering or as means of suspension, safe working
load shall be ascertained by adequate means. Every hoisting machine and all gear
referred to above shall be plainly marked with safe working load. In case hoisting
machine have a very able working load, each safe working load and the
conditions under which is applicable shall be clearly indicated. No part of any
machine or of any gear referred to above in this paragraph, shall be loaded beyond
safe working load except for the purposing the testing.
(d) In case departmental machine, safe working load shall be notified by the
Engineer, as regards contractor’s machine the contractor shall notify safe working
load of each machine to the engineer whenever he brings it to site of work get it
verified by the engineer.
10. Motors gearing transmission electric wiring and other dangerous part of hosting
appliances shall be provided with efficient safeguards, hosting appliances shall be
provided with such means as will reduce to the minimum risk of accidental decent of
loads, adequate precautions shall be taken to reduce to the minimum risk of any part of
suspended load becoming accidental displaced. When workers are employed on electrical
installation which are already energized, insulating mats wherein apparel such as gloves,
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 80 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
sleeves & boots, as may be necessary, shall be provided. Workers shall not wear any
rings, watches & carry keys or other material which are good conductors of electricity.
11. All scaffolds, ladders and other safety devices mentioned or described wherein shall be
maintained in a safe condition and no scaffolds, or ladder or equipment shall be altered or
removed while it is in use. Adequate washing facilities shall be provided at or near places
of work
12. This safety provision shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by display on a
notice board at a prominent place at the work spot. Persons responsible for ensuring
compliance with the Safety provisions shall be named therein by the Contractor.
13. To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating safety precautions,
arrangements made by the contractor shall be open to inspection by the Engineer or his
representative and the inspecting officers.
14. Notwithstanding the above provisions 1 to 14, the Contractor is not exempted from the
operation of any other Act or Rule in force.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 81 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
ANNEXURE `B’ (SEE Condition No. 27)
DETAILS OF KEY PEROSNNEL WITH TENDERER WHO ARE PROPOSED FOR THIS CONTRACT:-
Sr. no. Description of
category
Name Qualification Professional
experience
and details
of works
carried out
Since how
long in
service with
tenderer
Remarks
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
SIGNATURE OF TENDERER:-
Date:-
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 82 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
ANNEXURE `C’
Agreement format to be provided by NMMC.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 83 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 84 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 85 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 86 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
ANNEXURE ‘D’
INDEMNITY BOND
ON STAMP PAPER OF VALUE OF Rs. 100/-
In consideration of Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation incorporated under BPMC act 1919
and having its office at Head Office Building, 2nd
Floor, C.B.D. Belapur, Navi Mumbai 400 614.
(hereinafter referred to as the N.M.M.C, which expression, shall unless it be repugnant to the
context or meaning thereof includes its successors or assigns) having awarded to
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 115 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Table of Contents
Sr. Description No.
A. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM .................................................... B. PUBLIC ADRESS SYSTEM (P.A) ...................................................................................................... 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION: ................................................................................................................ 2. SCOPE : ................................................................................................................................................ 3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: ................................................................................................................... 4. APPLICABLE STANDARDS .............................................................................................................. 5. APPROVED MAKES ........................................................................................................................... 6. INSTALLATION: ................................................................................................................................ 7. COMMISSIONING : ............................................................................................................................ 8. DOCUMENTATION :.......................................................................................................................... 9. HANDOVER : ...................................................................................................................................... 10. TRAINING : ......................................................................................................................................... 11. MAINTENANCE : .............................................................................................................................. C. SECURITY SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 1. CLOSE CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV) .......................................................................... 2. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... D. ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM ................................................................................ 1. SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................................... 2. CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................................... 3 APPROVALS ....................................................................................................................................... 4. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................ 5. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENTS .................................................................................................... 6. DETECTOR ASSEMBLY.................................................................................................................... 7. DISPLAYS ON THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY ................................................................................ 8. PROGRAMMERS ................................................................................................................................ 9. NETWORK ........................................................................................................................................... 10. SAMPLING PIPE ................................................................................................................................ 11. SAMPLING HOLES ............................................................................................................................ 12. INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................. 13. TESTING ..............................................................................................................................................
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 116 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
A. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Life Safety System)
1.1 General
This performance specification provides the minimum requirements for the Fire Alarm System (Life Safety System). The system shall include, but not limited to all equipment, materials, labor, documentation and services necessary to furnish and install a complete, operational system to include but not limited to the following functions:
Smoke and fire detection. Sprinkler suppression system monitoring and control. Off-premise notification. Smoke control. Releasing Service One-way voice communication notification system. Two-way voice communication system.
1.2 Materials & Equipment
appliances, equipment and devices shall be listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency like UL864/FM/EN54 for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling (fire alarm) system and smoke control system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer, to be designated as the contractor, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system. The contractor shall provide, from the acceptable manufacturer's current product lines, equipment and components, which comply, with the requirements of these specifications. Equipment or components, which do not provide the performance and features, required by these specifications are not acceptable, regardless of manufacturer. Strict conformance to this specification is required to ensure that the installed and programmed system will function as designed, and will accommodate the future requirements and operations of the building owner. All specified operational features must be met without exception. All equipment and components shall be the manufacturer's current model. The contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system. All control panel assemblies and connected field appliances shall be provided by the same system supplier, and shall be designed and tested to ensure that the system operates as specified. The system shall utilize electronically addressable, microprocessor-based detectors as described in this specification. The equipment to be supplied will be considered only if it meets all sections of the performance specification.
The supplier shall submit a point-by-point statement of compliance for all sections in this specification. The statement of compliance shall consist of a list of all paragraphs within these sections. Where the proposed system complies fully with the paragraph, as written, placing the word "comply" opposite the paragraph number shall indicate such. Where the proposed system does not comply with the paragraph as written, and the supplier feels the proposed system will accomplish the intent of the paragraph, a full description of the function as well as a full narrative description of how its proposal will meet its intent shall be provided. Any submission that does not include a point-by-point statement of compliance as described herein shall be disqualified. Where a full description is not provided, it shall be assumed that the proposed system does not comply. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, services and materials necessary to furnish and install a complete, functional fire alarm system (System). The System shall comply in respects with all pertinent codes, rules, regulations and laws of the Authority, and local jurisdiction. The System shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the specifications, manufacturer's recommendations and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listings.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 117 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
It is further intended that upon completion of this work, the Owner/Consultant be provided with:
a. Complete information and drawings describing and depicting the entire system(s) as installed, including all information necessary for maintaining, troubleshooting, and/or expanding the system(s) at a future date.
b. Complete documentation of system(s) testing.
c. Certification that the entire system(s)
1.3 CODES & LISTING:
The equipment and installation shall comply with the current and latest edition of the following codes and listing :
A) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:
NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems NFPA 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 76 Telecommunication Facilities NFPA 318 Clean Room Applications NFPA 101 Life Safety Code NFPA 90A Air conditioning & ventilation system
Listed B). Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 9th Edition UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1971 Visual Notification Appliances UL 228 Door Holders UL 1481 Power Supply for fire protective signaling system. UL 1711 Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1635 Digital Alarm Communicator System Units Factory Mutual (FM) Approval
ADDENDUMS thereafter in UL Code for Fire Detection(2007). UL 9th Schedule Certification
International Standards Organization (ISO) ISO-9000 ISO-9001 European Union (EU) EMC Directive 89/336/ EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements
C) LOCAL CODES NATIONAL BUILDING CODES IS-2189
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 118 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
D). European Standards
EN54
E). German Standards
VDS
2.0 Panel Components & Functions
The control panel(s) shall be a multi-processor based networked system designed specifically for fire, one-way and two-way emergency audio communications, smoke control, extinguishing agent releasing system if necessitated, with integration modules for BMS or any third party control/annunciation. The control panel shall be UL/FM listed The control panel shall include all required hardware, software and site specific system programming to provide a complete and operational system. The control panel(s) shall be designed such that interactions between any applications can be configured, and modified . The control panel(s) operational priority shall assure that life safety takes precedence among the activities coordinated by the control panel.
The control panel shall include the following capacities: Support up to minimum 127 devices Support up to minimum 2500 analog/addressable points. Support network connections up to minimum 64 or other control panels and annunciator. Support multiple digital dialers and modems Support multiple communication ports and protocols Support up to a minimum of 1740 chronological events. The network of control panels shall include the following features: Ability to download all network applications and firmware from the configuration computer from the configuration computer from a single location on the system. Provide electronic addressing of analog/addressable devices. Provide an operator interface control/display that shall annunciate, command and control system functions. Provide an internal audible signal with different programmable patters to distinguish between alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor conditions. Provide a discreet system control switch provided for reset, alarm silence, panel silence, drill switch, previous message switch, next message switch and details switch. Provide system reports that provide detailed description of the status of system parameters for corrective action or for preventative maintenance programs. Reports shall be displayed by the operator interface or capable of being printed on a printer. Provide an authorized operator with the ability to operate or modify system functions like system time, date, passwords, holiday dates, restart the system and clear control panel event history file. Provide an authorized operator to perform test functions within the installed system.
The control panel shall contain a standby power supply that automatically supplies electrical energy to the system upon primary power supply failure. The system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery.
2.1 Operator's Interface
The system shall be designed and equipped to receive, monitor, and annunciate signals from devices and circuits installed throughout the building. Standard LED annunciator may be combined in common enclosures provided that the groups of LED's comprising each of the required annunciator are separated from one another (Detection, Supervisory, Status, and Security) and clearly labeled. A minimum 640-character LCD display shall be part of the main control panel for easy alarm reading and understanding. Receipt of alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals shall activate integral audible devices at the control panel(s) and at each remote annunciation device. The integral audible devices shall produce a sound output upon activation of not less than 85 dBA at 10 feet.
The annunciator shall contain the following system status indicators:
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 119 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
LCD character Backlit Liquid Crystal Display System Normal Indicator System Common Alarm Indicator System Common Trouble Indicator System Common Supervisory Indicator System Ground Fault Indicator System Common Security Indicator System Disabled Point(s) Indicator System Reset Switch with Indicator System Alarm Silence Switch with Indicator System Trouble Silence Switch with Indicator System Message Queue Scroll Switches. Digit Keypad to Enable/Disable System and Functions.
2.2. Audio
The system shall be capable of delivering multi-channel audio messages simultaneously over copper and/or fiber media. All audio messages and live pages shall originate at the one-way audio control unit. The one-way audio control unit shall store pre-recorded audio messages digitally. These messages shall be automatically directed to various areas in a facility under program control. The system shall support remote cabinets with zoned amplifiers to receive, amplify and send messages through speakers over supervised circuits. The one-way emergency audio control shall provide control switches to direct paging messages as follows:
"All Call" to direct the page messages to all areas in the facility, overriding all other messages and tones.
"Page to Evacuation Area" to direct the message to the evacuation area(s), overriding all other messages and tones.
"Page to Alert Area" to direct page messages to the area(s) receiving the alert message and tones, overriding all other messages and tones..
"Page to Balance Building" to direct page messages to the areas) in the facility NOT receiving either the evacuation area or alert area messages.
"Page by Phone" switch to select the firefighters telephone system as the source for paging.
The system shall be capable of delivering multiple audio messages simultaneously over copper and / or fiber media. All audio messages and live pages shall originate at the one-way emergency audio control unit. The one-way emergency audio control unit shall store pre-recorded audio messages digitally. These messages shall automatically direct to various areas in a facility under program control. The system shall support remote panels with zoned amplifiers to receive, amplify and distribute messages through speakers over supervised circuits. The two-way voice communications control unit shall provide two-way communications between remotely located phones and the command center. The control unit shall provide the ability to individually select and display each two-way voice communication circuit support up to five (5) remote telephones in simultaneous two-way voice communications.
Audio Amplifiers (Multi-Channel)
Provide as minimum one twenty (20) watt (Maximum capacity should be decided as per site requirement). audio amplifier per paging zone. The system software shall be capable of selecting the required audio source signal for amplification. To enhance system survivability, each audio amplifier shall automatically provide a local 3-3-3 1000 Hz temporal pattern output upon loss of the audio communications with the one-way audio control unit, during an alarm condition. Audio amplifiers shall be power limited and protected from short circuits conditions on the audio circuit wiring. Each amplifier output shall include a dedicated, selectable 25/70 Vrms output. Provide a standby audio amplifier that will automatically sense the failure of a primary amplifier, and replace the function of the failed amplifier.
2. 3 DACT Dialer
The system shall provide off premise communications capability using a digital alarm communications transmitter (DACT) for sending system events to multiple central monitoring
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 120 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
station (CMS) receivers. The system shall provide the CMS(s) with point identification of system events using Contact ID or SIA DCS protocols. In the event of a panel CPU failure during a fire alarm condition, the DACT degrade mode shall transmit a general fire alarm signal to the CMS.
2.4 Power Supply
System power supply(s) shall provide multiple powers limited 24 VDC output circuits as required by the panel. Upon failure of normal (AC) power, the affected portion(s) of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any system functions. Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power supply trouble signals shall identify the specific supply and the nature of the trouble condition.
All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the power supply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble and identify the specific power supply affected. All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 48 hours maximum.
All AC power connections shall be to the building's designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72 - The AC power circuit shall be installed in raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled permanently inside the each control panel the disconnect serves.
Power supply for all input & output devices to be driven from main Fire Alarm Panel.
2.5 Reports
The system shall provide the operator with system reports that give detailed description of the status of system parameters for corrective action, or for preventative maintenance programs. The system shall provide these reports via the main LCD, and shall be capable of being printed on any system printer.
The system shall provide a report that gives a sensitivity listing of all detectors that have less than 75% environmental compensation remaining. The system shall provide a report that provides a sensitivity (% Obscuration per foot) listing of any particular detector.
The system shall provide a report that gives a listing of the sensitivity of all of the detectors on any given panel in the system, or any given analog/addressable device loop within any given panel.
The system shall provide a report that gives a chronological listing of up to the last 1740 system events.
The system shall provide a listing of all of the firmware revision listings for all of the installed network components in the system.
2.6 Graphic & Smoke Control Annunciator -Fire fighters Smoke Control Station ( FSCS)
The FSCS shall provide a graphic representation of the facility HVAC system and stairwell pressurization system. Fan override and control switches and fan/damper status LEDs shall be provided as indicated on the shop drawings. The following system controls and indicators shall be provided on the FSCS: Power ON, Trouble, and Signal Silenced LEDs; System Reset, Silence, Trouble Silence, and Drill push buttons. It shall be possible to annunciate text messages via LCD display mounted in the FSCS enclosure. The FSCS shall provide an integral remote microphone for one-way audio system paging.
specific zone module shall be used for intelligent messaging to critical areas like stair cases in event of an emergency.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 121 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.7 Graphic Command Workstation
The command center shall function as the center point for all operational and administration functions required for the systems provided within the specification. The command center shall contain a console that will display and house any equipment necessary for system operation. Console space shall be provided for other equipment provided under other sections of the specifications. A single graphical workstation shall be provided that will enable primary control of the systems provided by this specification. An operator shall not have to operate multiple workstations to receive, view, process and record system events for each system provided. The graphical command workstation(s) shall display a different color text for each message type and color graphic diagrams/floor plans. Each detector has to be mapped in graphical workstation diagrams/floor plans. The graphical workstation diagrams/floor plans should have the each detector mapped. The graphical command workstation shall simultaneously display the following system event views; system event display, graphical diagram display, detailed event message/instructions, and user event log. The workstation shall be an latest personal computer which can support the all software & have enough memory to handle the data. The makes will be as per attached list. The workstation(s) shall be capable of annunciation and control of all fire detection and smoke control points. The computer shall be minimum of an Pentium Grade Pentium Processor 2.4 Ghz or higher with a 533monitor. Installation of the computer or monitor can be either desktop or floor mounting or rack/panel mounting.
The software shall provide multitasking type environment that allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. The operating program shall run within a 32-bit operating system such as Windows® XP. These Windows applications shall run simultaneously with other programs. The mouse or Alt-Tab keys shall be used to quickly select and switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel and other Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciating on-line alarms and monitoring functions.
Equipment included in the command center shall include: System annunciation and controls for. Fire detection. Fire suppression. Fire pump status Firefighters smoke control. Emergency one-way voice communications. Standby generator status indication and controls. Automatic transfer switch status indication and controls Radio communications Public intercom Public telephone Elevator monitor, status and controls
The graphic display screen shall organize and structure system events for easy user comprehension. The workstation display shall use four relational quadrants. When any event occurs:
The "list of events area" shall display the address of the alarm or off-normal point with type and description and time of the event in a prioritized color-coded event list. Highlighting an event in the event list area shall automatically cause the display of a graphical map and other three areas (described below) to display information relating to the highlighted event. The "map area" shall display color graphical representation of the area location in which the alarm or off-normal device is located. It shall be possible for the operator to manually zoom down to any portion of a vector-based graphic without aliasing, artifacting, or pixilation of the image. Preset zoom levels shall not be considered equal. The "event action area" shall display a customized set of written operator instructions for every state (alarm, trouble, restore, etc.) of each point. An event log shall record all events and operator actions to history for future review. An operator's log shall record operator's comments for each event in system history with time and date. The "image area" shall display a stored image of the device relating to the event highlighted in the event list area.
When processing fire alarm events the graphic workstation:
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 122 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Shall be capable of acknowledging, silencing, and resetting all fire alarm functions.
Shall be capable of manually activating, deactivating, enabling, and disabling individual fire alarm points.
Shall be capable of generating status, maintenance and sensitivity reports for fire alarm components.
Receipt of a fire alarm shall activate an audio WAV file over the workstation speakers alerting the operator
2.8 Field Mounted System Components
Intelligent Smoke Detectors:
General
The smoke detector shall have inbuilt microprocessor and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. Minimum to 125 intelligent smoke detectors should connect to one loop. Each intelligent addressable smoke detector's sensitivity shall be capable of being programmed electronically from Control Panel without any extra tools as most sensitive, more sensitive, normal, less sensitive or least sensitive. In addition to the five sensitivity levels the detector shall provide a pre-alarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the detector's alarm sensitivity value. The detector should continue to give TRUE alarms even if the loop controller on the main panel fails.
An alternate alarm sensitivity level shall be provided for each detector, which can be set to any of the five (5) sensitivity settings manually or automatically using a time of day event. In addition to the five alternate sensitivity levels the detector shall provide an alternate pre-alarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the detector's alternate alarm sensitivity value The detector shall be able to differentiate between a long drift above the pre-alarm threshold and fast rise above the threshold.
The detector's sensing element reference point shall automatically adjust, compensating for background environmental conditions such as dust, temperature, and pressure. Periodically, the sensing element real-time analog value shall be compared against its reference value. The detector shall provide a maintenance alert signal that 75% to 99% compensation has been used. The detector shall provide a dirty fault signal that 100% or greater compensation has been used.
The system shall allow for changing of detector types for service replacement purposes without the need to reprogram the system. The replacement detector type shall automatically continue to operate with the same programmed sensitivity levels and functions as the detector it replaced. System shall display an off-normal condition until the proper detector type has been installed or change in the application program profile has been made.
Multi-sensor Photo Thermal Detector :
The multi-sensor or multi-tech smoke detector which will have both photoelectric as well as thermal detection elements shall have inbuilt microprocessor, and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. The scattering of smoke particles shall activate the photo sensor. Each intelligent addressable smoke detector's sensitivity shall be capable of being programmed electronically from Control Panel without any extra tools as: most sensitive, more sensitive, normal, less sensitive or least sensitive. In addition to the five sensitivity levels the detector shall provide a pre-alarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the detector's alarm sensitivity value. The detector should continue to give TRUE alarms even if the loop controller on the main panel fails.. Alarm condition shall be based upon the combined input from the photoelectric, and thermal detection elements. Each detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient "environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour.. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 123 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
4D/Laser Photo Detector.
The 4D/Laser/equivalent detector shall have the ability to have the sensitivity of 0.08 OBS/FTor better. The detector shall have inbuilt microprocessor and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. The laser photo detector shall not require other cleaning requirements than those listed in NFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or specialized cleaning of the detector head shall not be required. The laser photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash green in normal operation and turn on steady red in alarm.
INTELLEGENT THERMAL DETECTOR:
The heat detector shall have a thermal sensing element /circuit. The detector shall have inbuilt microprocessor, not microcontroller and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. Detectors shall be rated at 15°F (9°C) per minute rate-of-rise and 135°F (57°C) fixed temperature The detector shall be capable of being addressed electronically from control panel without any extra tool.
ADRESSABLE BEAM DETECTOR:
The addressable optical beam detector or projected beam smoke detector shall be used for detection in large volumes and double heights. The set shall consist of a transmitter, receiver and control electronics. The transmitter shall project a modulated infrared light beam to the receiver. If there is smoke in the beam path, the receivers signal shall be reduced by the value proportional to the density of the smoke. If the signal is reduced to a level between the obscuration threshold and 93% for 8-10 seconds, the fire alarm relay shall be activated. The alarm obscuration threshold shall be set at 25%, 35% or 50% obscuration depending on the application. The typical coverage shall be equal or more than 100 m x 15.25 m. INTELLEGENT DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
The Smoke Detector housing shall accommodate intelligent photoelectric detector.
The housing shall also protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. The housing shall utilize an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in baked red enamel. Remote alarm LED indicators and remote test stations shall be provided.
When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal to be initiated and appropriate action taken to change over air handling system to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system.
SMOKE DETECTOR PHOTOELECTRIC
The detectors shall be use the photo electric ( light scattering ) principal to measure smoke density. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The detector shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of each of the individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 124 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value.
Detector Bases:
The bases shall be easy to install and mount and shall be of standard type or isolator base type or sounder base type. The sounder base shall be used where local or group alarm signaling is required. The sounder base emits a audible alarm when there is fire. The base shall, contain no electronics and support all series detector types.
3.0 Manual Stations
The fire alarm station shall be of polycarbonate construction and incorporate an internal toggle switch. A locked test feature shall be provided. The station shall be finished in red with silver "PULL IN CASE OF FIRE" lettering.
3.1 SpeakersLow Profile Speaker
The low profile speaker shall not extend more than (2.5cm) past the finished wall surface, and provide a switch selectable audible output of 2W (90dBA), 1W (87dBA), 1/2W (84dBA), or 1/4W (81dBA) at 10 ft. Wattage setting shall be visible with the cover installed. When the cover is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for all wiring.
3.2 Speaker-Strobes
Low Profile Speaker-StrobeThe low profile speaker/strobe shall not extend more than (2.5cm) past the finished wall surface, and provide a switch selectable audible output of 2W (90dBA), 1W (87dBA), 1/2W (84dBA), or 1/4W (81dBA) at 10 ft
Strobes shall provide synchronized flash output, that shall be switch selectable for output values of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd & 110cd. Wattage and candela settings shall be visible with the cover installed. When the cover is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for all wiring.
3.3 Programmable Electronic Exit Point Directional Sounders/Hooters:
Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, at a sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device and shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans. They Shall produce broad band directional sound to guide occupants to safe exists even in complete darkness. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971, be fully synchronized, and shall meet the following criteria: The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second. Equivalent alternate type will be also acceptable
3.4 Horns
Explosion proof - Class I
The horns shall provide 109 dBA output, and be polarized for supervised operation. The horns shall be UL listed for Class I Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D hazardous locations.
Explosion proof - Class I, II, III
The horns shall provide 109 dBA output, and be polarized for supervised operation. The horns shall be UL listed for Class I Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D; Class II Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G; Class III Division 1 and 2 hazardous locations.
3.5 Vibrating Bell-Explosion proof
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 125 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The bells shall provide 83 dBA output and be polarized for supervised operation. The bells shall be UL listed for Class I Groups B, C, D; Class II Groups E, F, G; Class III Division 1 and 2 hazardous locations.
3.6 Intelligent Modules
The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes, which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults.
Control Relay Module:
The Control Relay Module shall provide one form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware.
Dual Input Module:
The Dual Input Module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types:
The Dual Input (Dual Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide a means to selectively connect one of two (2) signaling circuit power risers to one (1) supervised output circuit. The dual input signal module shall support the following operation:
Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A, 25 Vrms @ 50w or 70 Vrms @ 35w of Audio)
Isolator Module:
Provide intelligent fault isolators modules. The Isolator Module shall be capable of isolating and removing a fault from a class A data circuit while allowing the remaining data loop to continue operating.
Monitor Module: The Monitor Module shall be factory set to support one (1) supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Non-Latching Monitor circuit.
Single Input Module:
The Single Input Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. . The single input module shall support the following circuit types:
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 126 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The Single Input (Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector, the module shall be capable of generating its own "ring tone". The single input signal module shall support the following operations:
Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A, 25Vrms @50w or 70 Vrms @ 35 Watts of Audio) Telephone Power Selector with Ring Tone (Fire Fighter's Telephone)
Waterflow-Tamper Module:
The Waterflow/Tamper Module shall be factory set to support two (2) supervised Class B input circuits. Channel A shall support a Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching Water flow Switch circuit. Channel B shall support a Normally-Open Active Latching Tamper Switch.
3.7 Telephone Handsets
The contractor shall Provide jack stations. The telephone handsets shall be red in color and have a 5 ft (1.3m) coiled cord.
Telephone Jacks The contractor shall provide stainless steel firefighter's telephone jack stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The jack station shall be clearly identified with the words "FIRE FIGHTER'S TELEPHONE" for use with portable fire fighter telephone handsets.
3.8 Power Supply
Standby power supply shall be an electrical battery with capacity to operate the system under maximum supervisory load for 24 hours and capable of operating the system for fifteen (15) minutes of evacuation alarm on all devices, operating at maximum load. The system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery. The system shall automatically adjust the charging of the battery to compensate for temperature.
3.9 Sequence of Operations
General - Audio
Upon alarm activation of any area smoke detector, heat detector, manual pull station, sprinkler water flow, the following functions shall automatically occur:
The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center.
Display the alarm event on the graphical workstation. The LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated.
The following audio messages and actions shall occur simultaneously:
An evacuation message shall be sounded on fire floors (zones) immediately above and below (adjacent to) the fire floor (zone),on the floor in fire condition. It is the intent of this message to advise occupants hearing this message that they are near danger and should leave the building via the stairs (nearest exit) immediately.
Activate visual strobes on the fire floors (zones) immediately above and below (adjacent to) the fire floor (zone) . The visual strobe shall continue to flash until the system has been reset. The visual strobe shall not stop operating when the "Alarm Silence" is pressed. An alert message shall be sounded on the remainder of building. It is the intent of this message to advise occupants to prepare for evacuation if necessary. An instructional message shall be sounded in the stairwells instructing occupants to move carefully and quickly down the stairs to exit the building and to exit to a safe floor if you encounter smoke in the stairwell.
An instructional message shall be sounded in the elevator cabs. It is the intent of this message to advise elevator occupants that an emergency exists, the elevator has been directed to the ground floor,
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 127 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
and that occupants should quickly exit the building. An instructional message shall be sounded in the lobby. It is the intent of this message to advise lobby occupants to leave the lobby and clear the area for arriving firefighters. An instructional message shall be sounded in the concourses connected to the building's lobby. It is the intent of this message to prevent new entries into the lobby by advising occupants not to attempt to enter the lobby of the affected building.
Provide selective paging to each individual floor (zone). In addition to the message/channels detailed above, a dedicated page channel shall be capable of simultaneously providing live voice instructions without interrupting any of the messages listed above shall be provided.
Transmit signal to the building automation system. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification. Activate automatic smoke control sequences. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. All stairwell/exit doors shall unlock throughout the building. All self-closing fire/smoke doors held open shall be released. Direct the closed circuit TV cameras to the alarm event and start video recording.
Duct Smoke Activation - Supervisory
The supervisory activation of any duct smoke detector, the following functions shall automatically occur:
The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center.
Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image.
The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the supervisory condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer.
Any remote or local annunciator LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated. Transmit signals to remote annunciators located in building security desk, the engineer's office and the building management office.
Transmit signal to the building automation system. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification. Shutdown the local air-handling unit.
Supervisory Operation
Upon supervisory activation of any sprinkler valve supervisory switch, fire pump off-normal, clean agent fire suppression system trouble, the following functions shall automatically occur:
The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center. Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image.
The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the supervisory condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer.
Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the supervisory zone shall be illuminated. Transmit signal to the central station PC with point identification.
Trouble Operation
Upon activation of a trouble condition or signal from any device on the system, the following functions shall automatically occur:
The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center.
Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 128 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The LCD keypad display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the trouble condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer.
Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the trouble zone shall be illuminated. Transmit signal to the central station PC with point identification.
Monitor Activation
Upon activation of any device connected to a monitor circuit, the following functions shall automatically occur:
The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center
Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image.
The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the status condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date.
All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer
Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the status zone shall be illuminated.
4.0 Notification Appliance Circuits
All notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit output rating of: 2 amps @ 24 vdc; 50 watts @ 25V audio, and 35 watts @ 70V audio. The notification circuits shall be power limited. Non-power limited circuits are not acceptable
4.1.1 NETWORK Wiring
The system supplied under this specification shall utilize node-to-node, direct-wired multi-priority peer-to-peer network operations. The backbone shall be multi-core wiring or commercial CAT5/6 cable or Single mode, multimode fiber cable depending on application. A Minimum of 64 ten loop panels shall be capable of being networked together and each panel shall have capability of addressing 2500 points .The system shall utilize independently addressed, smoke detectors, heat detectors and input/output modules as described in this specification. The peer-to-peer network shall contain multiple nodes consisting of the command center, main controller, remote control panels, LCD/LED annunciation nodes, and workstations. Each node is an equal, active functional node of the network, which is capable of making all local decisions and generating network tasks to other nodes in the event of node failure or communications failure between a nodes. When a network is wired in a Class B configuration, a single break or short on the network wiring isolates the system into two groups of panels. Each group continues to function as a peer-to-peer network working with their combined databases. When wired using a Class A configuration, a single break or short on the network wiring causes the system to isolate the fault, and network communication continues uninterrupted, without any loss of function. Should multiple wiring faults occur, the network re-configures into many sub-networks and continues to respond to alarm events from every panel that can transmit and receive network messages The remote control panel/network nodes shall meet the same requirements as described in control panel section and shall contain Common control switches with minimum 640 character LCD display, as required with Integral power supply(s) with secondary stand-by power. It shall also have signaling line circuits for communications with analog/addressable devices, as required, Audio amplification, as required, Notification appliance circuits, as required and Auxiliary function circuits and operations, as required.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 129 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The network communication shall be based on a Local Area Network (LAN). The network shall use a deterministic token-passing method. Collision detection and recovery type protocols are not acceptable substitutes due to life safety requirements. In addition, there shall be no master, polling computer, central file computer, display controller or other central element (weak link) in the network which, on failure, may cause complete loss of network communications or cause major degradation of network capability. There shall be no cascading of CPUs or master-slave relationships at the network level to facilitate network communications. Failure of any node shall not cause failure or communication degradation of any other node or change the network communication protocol among surviving nodes located within distance limitations
4.1.2 NETWORK REMOTE MONOITORING:
The system shall provide off premise or remote communications capability for transmitting system events to multiple Central Monitoring Station using web servers or Netcom cards on main panel using the open TCP/IP protocol The system shall provide the remote location with point identification of system events.
4.2 Submittals
It is the responsibility of the contractor to meet the entire intent and functional performance detailed in these specifications. Approved submittals shall only allow the contractor to proceed with the installation and shall not be construed to mean that the contractor has satisfied the requirements of these specifications. The contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of documentation within 30 calendar days after award of purchase order. Each submittal shall include a cover letter providing a list of each variation that the submittal may have from the requirements of the contract documents. In addition the Contractor shall provide specific notation on each shop drawing, sample, catalog cut, data sheet, installation manual, etc. submitted for review and approval, of each such variation. All drawings and diagrams shall include the contractor's title block, complete with drawing title, contractor's name, address, date including revisions, and preparer's and reviewer's initials
Product Data
Data sheets with the printed logo or trademark of the manufacturer for all equipment. Indicated in the documentation will be the type, size, rating, style, and catalog number for all items proposed to meet the system performance detailed in this specification. The proposed equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
System Calculations
Complete calculations shall be provided which show the electrical load on the following system components:
Each system power supply, including stand alone booster supplies. Each standby power supply (batteries). Each notification appliance circuit. Each auxiliary control circuit that draws power from any system power supply.
4.3 Quality Assurance
The contractor shall have successfully installed similar system fire detection, evacuation voice and visual signaling control components on a previous project of comparable size and complexity. The owner reserves the right to reject any control components for which evidence of a successful prior installation performed by the contractor cannot be provided.
The contractor shall have in-house engineering and project management capability consistent with the requirements of this project. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer shall perform the detailed engineering design of central and remote control equipment. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer shall produce all panel and equipment drawings and submittals, operating manuals. The contractor is responsible for retaining qualified and approved representative(s) of those system manufacturers specified for detailed system design and documentation, coordination of system installation requirements, and final system testing and commissioning in accordance with these specifications.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 130 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
4.4 Pre-Installation Requirements
The provider shall submit a detailed project plan that will describe in detail how the provider will approach the project, from inception to finalization. The plan must include at a minimum the following information:
Project Staging Project Management Equipment Schedules Installation Time Lines Other Trade Requirements Final Acceptance Testing Personnel Resumes Progress Report Sample
All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with each manufacturer's recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturers riser/connection diagram and details for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data.
4.5 Start and Completion Dates
The starting and completion dates for this work will be established at the pre-bid meeting.
4.6 Training
The System Supplier shall schedule and present a minimum of 8 hours of documented formalized instruction for the building owner, detailing the proper operation of the installed System.The instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by a person trained in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and who is also thoroughly familiar with the Installation. The instruction shall cover the schedule of maintenance required by NFPA 72 and any additional maintenance recommended by the system manufacturer.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 131 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.0 SYSTEM OPERATION FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS AND PRODUCTS
5.1 General: The system shall be integrated into a comprehensive system, to provide the functional performance described as follows:
5.1.1 Fire Detection and Alarm System
5.1.1.1 The fire detection and alarm system shall monitor and display the activation of each device in the system, such as heat detector, smoke detector, manual break-glass unit, sprinkler water flow switch, sprinkler valve tamper switch, hose reel water flow switch and hose reel valve tamper switch or any other input device which may be required.
5.1.1.2 The system shall initiate output functions such as automatic alarm annunciation via speakers, fans shutdown, automatic notification to the Fire main control PC and activation of audible hooters/directional sounders/strobes.
5.1.1.3 The system shall be of the addressable intelligent type, completely supervised, such that a break in any wire (loop) shall not prevent any device from operating. The system shall be of the type such that each device connected to the system shall be provided with unique address and separately identified at the Main control panel (MCP).
5.1.1.4 The wiring shall be monitored agaifailure. Detection addressable loops, capable of handling minimum of 250 addressable points shall return to the control panel.
5.1.2 Emergency Paging And Voice Alarm
5.1.2.1 The system shall permit communication in the form of paging from the main control panel and telephone switchboard to any floor or group of floors simultaneously. The system shall be capable of manual operation or automatic operation initiated by the fire alarm system. Speakers shall be located as required to achieve acceptable audibility in all Communication addressable loops will be supervised and therefore return to the control panel.
5.1.3 Emergency Telephone
5.1.3.1 The emergency telephone system shall provide two way communications capability between the main control panel and jacks for emergency telephone handsets. The emergency telephone handsets shall be furnished as part of the overall system.
5.2 Scope
5.2.1 The Main control panel shall be located in the main control room now called the Fire Command Centre (FCC) as located in the drawings. The appropriate authorities shall approve the exact location.
5.2.2 A active & networkable remote repeater panel shall also be installed at designated places and shall repeat all alarm functions displayed at the main control panel.
5.2.2.1 Graphics software shall be loaded on the PC in the FCC and capable of displaying all information graphically. It shall be capable of uploading drawings in the AutoCAD format and pop up alarms or silence them.
5.2.2 photoelectric type smoke detector shall be with integral microprocessor and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. In case of the failure of the main loop controller the detector shall be capable of operating in standalone mode or degrade mode and continue to take decisions
5.2.3 Heat detectors of the fixed temperature (57 deg.C) type or rate of rise of temperature type shall be used in areas environmentally unsuited for smoke detectors such Kitchens, Valet Laundries, Emergency Generator rooms,
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 132 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.2.4 Each fan system shall be provided with a duct-mounted smoke detector, which utilizes full width sensing probes and is suitable for the air velocities to which it is subjected. Duct mounted smoke detectors concealed from view shall be supplied with a remote indicator, located near the location of
5.2.5 Break-glass stations (manual fire alarm stations) shall be located on the occupied side of the door to each exit stair and at intermediate locations as required (Maximum distance between pull stations shall not exceed 60 m). .
5.2.6 Sprinkler, Hose reel water flow switch and valve tamper switch shall be provided at each sprinkler system valve location (the flow and tamper switches shall be generally furnished and mounted by the sprinkler system installer and wired by the fire detection alarm system installer).
5.2.7 Magnetic hold open devices shall be provided where required for the automatic release of smoke / fire doors.
5.3 System Operation
5.3.1 The system shall be arranged for categories of alarm inputs and provide output functions appropriate to each of the categories;
5.3.1.1 Supervisory Monitor input : The following inputs shall be considered supervisory monitoring functions:
5.3.2.1 Sprinkler system shut off valve tamper switch.
5.3.2.2 Hose Reel cabinet tamper switch
5.3.2.3 Removal of a smoke detector from its base.
5.3.2.4 Fire / Sprinkler pump status (i.e. running, power available, malfunction).
5.3.2.5 Wiring faults.
5.3.3 Activation of a supervisory monitoring device shall provide the following indications:
5.3.3.1
of alarm.
5.3.3.2 Printer shall print clear next message on the event log indication the device, which initiated a trouble alarm.
5.3.3.3 An alarm signal shall be automatically sent to the local control room as well as REMOTE control room if designed This may be accomplished by means of an web server /Netcom/ digital dialer.
5.3.3.4 In case of fire all lift call and door buttons and signals shall become inoperative, lifts serving that floor shall be signaled to immediately return to the ground floor or as designated by the local Fire department and be held for the exclusive use of the Fire Brigade. Should such an alarm occur on the ground floor, the lifts shall be signaled to return to an alternate floor which is not in alarm.
5.3.3.5 Signals shall be sent directly to heating, ventilating and air conditioning fan motor controllers for status monitoring circuits to confirm the operation of the fan systems.
5.3.3.6 The details of the fan control sequence shall be as follows:
5.3.3.7 All fans serving the areas affected by the alarm condition shall shutdown.
5.3.3.8 Smoke extraction fan system shall have to be started
5.3.3.9 Stair pressurization fans shall be started.
5.4.1.1 Signals shall be transmitted to the paging system to display zone in alarm.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 133 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.4.1.2 The printer shall print a clear text message on the event log printer The printer shall print the device information indicating clearly in plain language which device is in alarm, the time, and the date associated with the alarm. The printer shall print all follow-up information regarding this alarm, such as acknowledge, reset etc.
5.4.1.3 All access control doors shall be released in case of fire condition shall allow for more than one floor at a time to be displayed.
5.4.1.4 The automatic voice evacuation alarm shall be initiated from the fire alarm system upon activation
seconds followed by an automatic preselected voice evacuation message. At the end of each
voice evacuation signal. This sequence of alarm shall sound until the signal silence switch is operated at the main fire alarm control panel or the fire alarm has been reset as described previously. The voice evacuation signal shall be distinct, authoritative without any inflection and shall be repeated in several languages as agreed with the fire brigade.
5.4.1.5 The alert tone shall consist of an introductory pulse tone for fifteen (15) seconds followed by an alert message to advise that this floor is not in alarm but the floors that are in alarm shall be stated. The message shall also state that the occupants shall be prepared to evacuate the building when the evacuation alarm is given. The alert tone shall be distinctly different from that of the evacuation alarm.
5.4.1.6 Each stairwell shall receive a voice message without a fire alarm tone. The message shall state that there is an emergency in the building anyone presently in the stairwell shall not re-enter any floors but should proceed immediately to the ground floor exit level. Zone circuits shall be designed for this activity
5.4.1.7 During the automatic transmission of the fire alarm and alert tones, it shall be possible at the main fire alarm panel to permit selective voice paging. Upon activation of manual controls witches and the microphone push-to-talk switch, it shall be possible to transmit a message to the selected areas.
tone for fifteen (15) seconds followed by an announcement or message. The message shall follow
by a red indicator located adjacent to the microphone. When the microphone button is released, the
automatic voice evacuation or alert mode until reset as mentioned above.
5.4.1.8 It shall be possible to load a variety of prerecorded message plus combinations of floor fire alarms prerecorded message, which shall all be selected by the system software. Amendments to the prerecorded message and any reprogramming of the operating system shall be accomplished by front panel operated push buttons, selector switches and a keypad.
5.4.1.9 It shall be possible to transmit an alarm tone to speakers in one zone while sending a voice message to another zone while the rest of the building is receiving alert tone, all at the same time.
5.4.1.10 Each speaker zone (with dual circuits) shall be connected to its own amplifier. It shall therefore be possible to have as many channels as there are speaker zone. A minimum of three (3) channels shall be supplied; an ALERT channel, an EVAC channel and a PAGE channel.
5.5.1.1 Zoning of speaker circuit shall be as indicated in the drawings.
5.5.1.2 The emergency evacuation and voice alarm system amplification equipment shall be sized to accommodate the total quantity of speakers for each channel (total of three) plus 25% spare reserve capacity in each channel.
5.5.1.3 The system shall be provided with redundant amplifiers arrange in such a manner that failure of an amplifier shall not result in loss of acceptable audibility in any area of the building.
5.5.1.4 Emergency Telephone System: All remote emergency telephones will communicate with the emergency telephone control panel at the main control room:
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 134 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.5.1.5. The insertion of any telephone handset into its jack will cause the appropriate phone location indicator to flash and a distinctive audible pulsing sound to be heard in the fire command centre. The subsequent picking-up of the master phone and operation of that phone selector switch will silence the pulsing tone, cause the phone location.
5.5.1.6 The emergency telephone system will provide the capacity to handle simultaneous use of multiple remote phones. All phone jacks will be annunciated and monitored against fault or tampering (i.e. supervised).
5.5.1.7 The removal of all remote telephone handsets from their jacks will cause the restoration of all normal supervisory functions. If any remote phone is not removed, then the appropriate phone zone indicator will flash and the pulsing tone will resume in the fire command centre.
5.6 Coordination with Other Systems
The fire detection and alarms system shall have interface with other building systems, which are described under other sections of the report, as follows:
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Building Automation System (BAS)
Sprinkler / Pumps system
The life safety system is required to monitor fire hydrant / sprinkler pump status. The pump controllers shall have the necessary volt free output signals available.
5.7 Cables
5.7.1.1 Cabling for Fire Alarm System shall be FRLS armoured / un-amrmoured . Un-armoured cables should be laid thru metal conduits
5.7.1.2 The cables used shall be exclusively for Fire Detection System. The multi-core cables shall not be shared for other low voltage or high voltage circuits.
5.7.1.3 The cables connected to detectors shall be given S loop on both the sides of the detectors which shall be properly clamped to the ceiling. Loop shall also be left where cables connects sounders, panels, dampers etc. Appropriate glands shall be provided where the cables enters the junction box.
5.7.1.4 Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen. Care shall be taken while laying cables to avoid kinks. At all the changes in direction (vertical and horizontal planes) the cables shall be bent smooth with a radius as recommended by the manufacturers.
5.7.1.5 No joints shall be allowed between two points. The sleeve at joints shall be shaved off like a pencil and shall not be cut square to avoid cutting of conductors.
5.7.1.6 Cabling scope shall be supply and laying of cables of core sizes minimum size 2 core x 1.5 sq mm copper conductor FRLS Cables. Depends on the length of the loop, contractor has to select the core sizes. However the core sizes should not be less than 1.5 Sq.mm dia.
5.7.2..1 All cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. Loop wiring shall be of 1.5 sq mm 500 Volts.
5.7.2.2 All initiating, and supervisory circuit wiring shall be not less than 2.5mm2, 500 volts..
5.7.2.3 Fire Alarm System and PA speaker cables should not have the same colour code. Both should have separate colours to identify easily.
5.7.2.4 All field wiring shall be completely supervised. No cables more than two nos. should be saddled directly in to wall /ceiling. Contractor should use cable tray/trunking for wherever more than two cables are to be layed.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 135 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.7.2.5 All speaker and telephone circuits shall be not less than 2.5mm2, 500 volts copper conductor FRLS
cables.
5.7.2.6 Cabling shall be completely installed, field connections made and tested for stray voltage, short circuits, and ground faults prior to connection to the intelligent modules.
5.7.2.7 All loop cabling shall be identified by ins and outs. Ins is defined as coming from the panel.
5.7.2.8 Red and Black must be used for 24 VDC panel power circuit. Audio visual indicating circuits shall be colour coded. Colour code shall not be duplicated in the same panel.
5.7.2.9 No voltage supply from any other source than the primary power 230 VAC and the panel 24 VDC power supply shall be utilized.
5.7.2.10 Intelligent loop circuits shall be labeled at all junction locations by the panel number and loop number.
5.7.2.11 Intelligent loop circuits shall be provided with adequate junction boxes be expandable and provide a means for connecting to the loop in the junction box.
5.7.2.12 Control and other panels shall be mounted with sufficient clearance for observation and testing. Fire alarm junction boxes shall be clearly marked for distinct identification..
5.7.2.13 All fire alarm junction boxes should be mounted in approved locations for ease of maintenance from floor level.
5.7.2.14 All junction boxes shall be made up in a uniformly and orderly manner.
5.8 Fire Alarm Control Panels and GA ( GRPAHICS node ) OPERATIONAL SPECS
5.8.1 Each network FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANLEL now called FACP shall contain a microprocessor-based central processing unit (CPU). The FACP shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules, local and remote operator terminals, printers, annunciators, emergency voice communication systems, public address system, building management system, and other system controlled devices. The Fire Alarm System shall include all required hardware and system programming to provide a complete and operational system, capable of providing the protected premises with the following functions.
5.8.1.1 Modular systems manufacture with a layered app
size requirement.
5.8.1.2 All system operational software is to be stored in FLASH memory.
5.8.1.3 System response to any alarm condition must occur within 3 seconds, regardless of the size and the complexity of the installed system.
5.8.2 Each FACP on the network shall perform the following functions:
5.8.2.1 Supervise and monitor all intelligent/addressable detectors and monitor modules connected to the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions.
5.8.2.2. Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits throughout the facility. Voice evacuation speakers to be monitored by the public address system.
5.8.2.3. Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm condition. Operate all notification appliances and auxiliary devices as programmed.
5.8.2.4. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory or alarm, condition on operator's terminal, panel display, and annunciators.
5.8.2.5. Visually display sprinkler valve and water flow detectors.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 136 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.8.2.6. Visually display status of emergency power.
5.8.2.7. Shall have controls for unlocking stairway doors.
5.8.2.8. Graphically display all zones.
5.8.2.9. Trouble alarm for public address system.
5.8.2.10. Trouble Alarm for Building Management System.
5.8.2.11. System status LEDs for Test status, CPU Fail status, Ground Fault status, Disable status
5.8.2.12. Common control switches for reset, Alarm silence, panel silence, drill silence.
5.8.2.13. Other operator control switches such as previous message switch. Next message switch, and more details switch.
5.8.3 .1 Each FACP node shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel which shall include individual, colour coded system status LEDs, and an alpha-numeric keypad for field programming and control of the node.
5.8.3.2. All programming or editing of the existing programming in the system shall be achieved without special equipment or interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel.
5.8.3.3. Each FACP node shall be capable of providing the following features:
5.8.3.4 Block Acknowledge for Trouble Conditions
5.8.3.5 Rate Charger Control
5.8.3.6 Control-By-Time (Delay, Pulse, time of day, etc.)
5.8.3.8 Environmental Drift Compensation (selectable ON or OFF)
5.8.3.9. Smoke Detector Pre-alarm Indication at Control Panel
5.8.3.10 NFPA 72 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test
5.8.3.11 System Status Reports
5.8.3.12 Alarm Verification, by device, with tally
5.8.3.13 Multiple Printer Interface
5.8.3.14 Multiple CRT Display Interface
5.8.3.15 Non-Fire Alarm Module Reporting
5.8.3.16 Automatic NFPA 72 Detector Test
5.8.3.17 Programmable Trouble Reminder
5.8.3.18 Upload/Download System Database to PC Computer
5.8.3.19 One-Man Walk Test
5.8.3.20 Smoke Detector Maintenance Alert
5.8.3.21 Security Monitor Points
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 137 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.8.3.22 Alpha-numeric Pager Interface
5.8.3.23 On-line or Off-line programming
5.8.3.24 Interface with security system, Building Management System public address system.
5.8.3.25 Ground fault detection.
5.8.4 Fire Alarm Central Processing Unit
5.8.4.1 "The proposed Fire Alarm System shall be from a single UL listed manufacturer for complete compatibility of the proposed large peer-to-peer networked system. Master-Slave network will not be acceptable. Each occupant shall have its own Fire Alarm Control Panel as a Node in the Network complete with its own Network Control Annunciator, Web Server, Graphics Control Station and BACnet Gateway for integration with the individual Occupants Building Management System.
5.8.4.2 The Fire Alarm System for the areas which Occupants share with other Occupants due to the lack of Fire Compartmentalization in the common area shall be controlled by the Network Control By Event Equations, as this area is treated as a Life Safety Risk by all the Occupants. When the fire is sensed by any one Node in the Network for the Shared Area shall be annunciated at the Network Control Annunciator of all the other Occupants. All the Outputs associated with the Fire Alarm Event in the Shared Area shall be actuated / triggered automatically like activation of Pressurization Fans, Fire Dampers to close, Sounder / Strobes to be activated, Ventilation Fans to be run on double speed etc. in the Shared Area, as if the Fire Alarm Event has occurred in all the Nodes which share the Common Area. The Alarmed System for the Shared Area shall only be Controlled and Reset by a separate Network Control Annunciator dedicated for the Shared Area, after due investigation by the authorities concerned."
5.8.4.3 Peer-to-Peer Fire Alarm Network
5.8.4.3.1 Peer-to-Peer Fire Alarm Network is the interface with allows intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels to form a network. Each local control panel (network node) maintains its own area of protection, while monitoring and controlling other areas (other network nodes).
5.8.4.3.2 Local information shall be displayed at each network node. In areas such as a security office, where the entire network must be monitored, network annunciators shall be required.
5.8.4.3.3 Features:
Fiber optic (multi-mode), wire, or combination wire/fiber communications path.
NFPA Style 4 or Style 7 Network operation.
Based on proven technology.
True peer-to-peer communications. Each node stores its own program and communicates equally with all other nodes.
Token-passing non-collision Protocol.
Inherently regenerative system. Each node acts as a repeater to reshape and regenerate data signals. Failure of any node does not affect any other node / communications among surviving nodes.
High-speed data communications (312, 500 BPS).
Simple plug-in module, the network shall be compatible to panels anywhere on the network.
Multiple Network Control Stations (NCS) may be placed anywhere on the network. Additional
Multiple Intelligent Network Annunciators (INA) may be placed anywhere on the network.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 138 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
NCS and INA display all network activity. Unlike competitive systems, the point display capacity is NOT held to less than the maximum network capacity.
Single small-gauge twisted pair wire (no shield necessary) for data communications path.
Electrical isolation between nodes.
Network clock synchronization.
History Buffers on INA, NCS and Intelligent Fire Control Panels.
Powerful Cooperative-Control-by-Event allows point(s) on one node to activate point(s) on other nodes. Any input can turn on any output, network-wide.
NCS Network Control Station
The NCS shall based on a UL 864 recognized computer. Special hardware and software are to be added by manufacturer to make the NCS operate as a Command Center.
5.8.4.4 Network Graphics Control Station
5.8.4.4.1 The Network Control Station (NCS) is a high performance desktop computer with text and color graphics display capability of all network events and points. The NCS runs under the user-friendly Windows® environment.
5.8.4.4.2 NCS Hardware Features
Pentium® based computer consisting of:
Intel® 800MHz or better Pentium® IV microprocessor or better
256 MB RAM with 512 MB option.
8 MB video SDRAM or better
512 KB cache memory or better
80 GB hard drive or better
1.44 MB floppy drive windows® 2000 keyboard
PS/2 mouse
350 Watt power supply.
52X CD-RW drive/DVD RW drive
Sound card, microphone and internal speakers
10 KA surge protector
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 139 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.8.4.4.3 NCS Software Features:
Windows® 2000 operating system
As built location of all devices and detectors on the loop.
Mouse control with extensive use of Windows-
Vectors to a screen displaying an alarm with or without operator intervention.
Cursor changes automatically to indicate on-screen action areas.
New and Acknowledged Event boxes display all off-normal status simultaneously with graphic screens.
Operator log-on with response tracking.
History Manager records operator, event, and response with time-and-date stamp to hard drive.
Multiple search filters make History Manager a power management tool.
An unlimited number of events can be stored in the history manager. A warning is generated every 100 events after 100,000 events are stored.
A complete library of device icons is included.
Custom device icons can be created in the field.
Add, edit, and delete devices and screens in the field.
Link devices or system events to voice (*.wav), text, or bitmap files.
Up to five states can be visually represented for each input device: Normal, Trouble, Alarm, Pre-Alarm (detectors), Disabled.
Up to two states can be visually represented for each system Trouble: Normal, Trouble.
Off-Normal Event window (color coded).
Network-wide Disabled Device window.
Mini-History viewer, last 1,000 events (color coded).
Programmable access per feature, per node, per user matrix.
Logs in history any programming changes.
GSP (Graphic Setup Program) imports DWG-formatted (AutoCAD®) files to BMP.
Graphic Editing and Navigation aids (on-site modifiable).
SVGA 1024 x 768 color graphics.
Programmable Alarm and Trouble tones (variable frequency).
Control ON/OFF all networked panels
Archived history files.
5.8.4.5 Network Control Annunciator(Repeater Panel)
5.8.4.5.1 The Network Control Annunciator (NCA) shall be a 168 or higher- character backlit LCD display with operator keypad for the network. As a remote node on a network, it provides both system control and display capabilities for all network nodes.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 140 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.8.4.5.2 The NCA shall have optional display for the fire control panels. When mounted in the control cabinet and connected to a stand-alone panel, it provides system control and display capabilities for a stand-alone panel. When connected to a networked panel as a primary display, it can provide network control and status/history display capabilities.
5.8.4.5.3 Hardware Features:
Full supervision of all inputs and network integrity.
Enhanced-format 168 or higher -character LCD display with backlighting.
Keyboard interface (EIA-232)
Ten LED status indicators: Power, Fire Alarm, Pre-Alarm, Security Alert, Supervisory, Trouble, Signal Silence, CPU failure, Point Disabled, Other Event.
Alphanumeric keypad with tactile and audible feedback.
Four status relays: Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, Security (Form-C).
Nonvolatile real-time clock can be synchronized with network by master node.
Optional Security Key switch enable to NCA.
Optional Security Tamper switch.
Individual Enable / Disable or Group Enable/Disable local and networked zones.
Control ON/OFF of local (the panel in the same cabinet and networked control points.
Read Status of local (the panel in the same cabinet) and networked points and zones.
Network event display and optional CRT with keyboard.
Network master fire phone, paging control, HVAC control.
Network-wide: Acknowledge, Silence, Reset.
Lamp Test (local to NCA).
History Buffer ( 1,000 System events).
Report status of networked panels and their respective field devices to a central station.
One master level and nine user level passwords. The Master can assign each User access levels (programming, alter status).
Intuitive user guidance program including interactive soft keys.
Enhanced Read Status / Alter Status displays.
New history filters for report displaying and printing: All Events, Only Alarms, Only Troubles, Only Supervisory, Only Security, Time Interval, Point Range.
Fully programmable node-mapping subsystem.
New Advanced / Basic Walk-test program.
Timer control for Auto Silence, AC Fail Delay.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 141 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.8.5 Web Server
The Web Server or equivalent Network card with TCPIP connectivity shall be a web-based device that acts as an HTML server, allowing remote access to the network via the internet or an intranet. With the NWS interface, users can view fire alarm control panel (FACP) event history, event status, device properties and other information based on access permissions defined by the system administrator. Features: For the Web Server and Serial Configuration Tool:
Access network device statuses and properties remotely via the Internet or an Intranet.
Standard Ethernet over IP connection.
Supports up to 64 operator and 64 administrator accounts.
Online Authorization log keeps a record of the username, time and date of the last 50 users to access the system.
Built-in password security and user-access record.
Multiple users can access the web server at the same time.
Supports standard Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher.
Intuitive Explorer-style user interface.
5.8.6 BACnet/MODBUS/LONWORKS Gateway
The BACnet/eqv Gateway shall provides an interface between fire panel network and a network using the BACnet/IP/eqv communication protocol. BACnet protocol is an American National Standard (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995). With the Gateway interface, devices on fire alarm control panels are represented as BACnet objects to the BACnet client. The user subscribes to Event Notification objects per FACP, and the BACnet device receives events from objects on the FACP as a result of this subscription.
5.8.7. Loop Controller (LC)
Loop Control boards shall be provided to monitor and control each of the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loops in the network node. The loop Control board shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be capable of operating in local mode in the case of a failure in the main CPU of the control panel. In local mode, the loop interface board shall detect alarms and activate output devices on its own SLC loop.
The LIB shall not require any jumper cuts or address switch settings to initialize SLC Loop operations.
The loop interface board shall provide power to, and communicate with, all of the intelligent detectors and addressable modules connected to its SLC Loop over a single pair of wires. This SLC Loop shall be capable of operation as NFPA Style 7.
The loop interface board shall receive information from all intelligent detectors and shall process this information to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for that particular detector. The loop interface board software shall include software to automatically adjust and compensate for dust accumulation to maintain detector performance as it is affected by environmental factors. The analog information may also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.
The LCB shall communicate with each intelligent addressable detector and addressable module on its SLC loop and verify proper device function and status.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 142 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5.8.8. Enclosures
Control panels shall be housed in FM/UL-listed or BS/IEC Standards cabinets suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting. Cabinets shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and the manufacturer's standard finish. The back box and door shall be constructed of 1.5mm steel with provisions for electrical cable connections into the sides and bottom. The door shall provide a key lock and include a transparent opening for viewing all indicators. For convenience, the door shall have the ability to be hinged on either the right or left-hand side. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and future expansion.
5.8.9 Field Programming
The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of electronic integrated circuits.
All local FACP node programming shall be accomplished through the FACP keyboard or through a portable laptop.
All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
The programming function shall be enabled with a password that may be defined specifically for the system when it is installed. Multi-levels of password protection shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One level is used for status level changes such as zone disable or manual on/off commands. A second (higher-level) is used for actual change of program information.
5.8.10 Specific System Operations
Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all intelligent detectors in the FACP node from each system keypad or from the keyboard of the video terminal. Sensitivity range shall be within allowed UL limits.
. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled for alarm verification. Each FACP shall keep a count of the number of times each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands.
5.8.11 System Point Operations
All devices in the FACP node may be enabled or disabled through the local keypad or video terminal.
Any FACP node output point may be turned on or off from the local system keypad or the video terminal.
Point Read: The FACP node shall be able to display the following point status diagnostic functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point shall be annunciated for the parameters listed:
Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: Each FACP node shall automatically interrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time.
If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below or above normal limits, then the system shall enter the trouble mode, and the particular intelligent detector shall be annunciated on the system display, network display and printed on the optional system printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.
Conventional heat detectors shall have a combination rate of rise and fixed temperature rated at 57°C for areas where ambient temperatures do not exceed 38°C, and 93°C for areas where the temperature does not exceed 65°C.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 143 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Conventional heat detectors shall be a low profile, ceiling mount type with positive indication of activation.
The rate of rise element shall consist of an air chamber, a flexible metal diaphragm, and a factory calibrated, moisture-proof, trouble free vent, and shall operate when the rate of temperature rise exceeds 15 °C per minute.
The fixed temperature element shall consist of a fusible alloy retainer and actuator shaft.
Conventional heat detectors shall have a smooth ceiling rating of 250 square meter.
5. 10 Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module
Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLC loops.
The monitor module shall mount in a 100 mm square, 100 mm deep electrical box.
The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 60 mm x 30 mm x 13 mm.
5.11 Batteries and External Charger
5.11.1 Battery Batteries shall be 12 volt, Cd type or better and shall not be hazardous to humans or environment
The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks for refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required.
Battery shall be heavy duty type of life span of minimum 5 years.
5.12
control through the Building Management System for mechanical smoke control systems. The control panel shall graphic display all floors with each smoke control zone that utilizes exhaust method. Size of panel shall have layout indicated at 1:400 or bigger. Al
Zone indicators shall be provided for all smoke control zones to illuminate the zones using LEDs. Each zone shall have a distinctive colour.
Each smoke -auto-off switch associated with each smoke control zone.
In the auto position, the smoke control sequence in the respective zone shall be activated by zone smoke detectors.
In the on position, the smoke control sequence shall be automatically activated in the respective zone.
In the off position the smoke control fans and associated equipment cannot start in the respective zone or shall shutdown.
l panel shall communicate with the Building Management System to initiate startup and/or shut down of related smoke control fans, air handling units, dampers, and other related smoke control equipment.
5.13 Uninterruptable Power System ( Optional )
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 144 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The Contractor shall furnish and install an Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) with the following features:
Voltage:
Input 240 Volts, single phase, two wire plus ground
Output 240 Volts, single phase, two wire plus ground.
Output load capacity to be designed by the contractor as per load.
Surge protection
Overload capacity 200% for 60 seconds in normal operation.
Monitoring and control
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with the IFC, NEC, NFPA 72, local codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.
All cables ,junction boxes, cable supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.
All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.
Manual Pull Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi flush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 1 m nor more than 1.2 m above the finished floor.
Typical Operation
Actuation of any manual station, smoke detector, heat detector or water flow switch shall cause the following operations to occur unless otherwise specified:
. Activate all programmed speaker circuits in a zone or throughout.
Actuate strobe units until the panel is reset in a zone or throughout.
. Light the associated indicators corresponding to active speaker circuits.
Release all magnetic door holders to doors to adjacent zones on the floor from which the alarm was initiated.
Where required, return all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
A smoke detector in any elevator lobby shall, in addition to the above functions, return all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
Smoke detectors in the elevator machine room shall return all elevators in to the primary floor. Heat detectors installed to shut down elevator power shall do so in accordance with ANSI A17.1 requirements and be coordinated with the electrical installation. Smoke detectors at the primary level elevator lobby shall return elevation to an alternate level.
Duct type smoke detectors shall, in addition to the above functions, shut down the ventilation system or close associated control dampers as appropriate.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 145 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
. Activation of any sprinkler system low pressure switch, on valve tamper switch, shall cause a system supervisory alarm indication.
Commissioning
Commissioning shall include pre-testing, troubleshooting, acceptance testing, and punch list.
The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. The Contractor shall pre-test the system before the final acceptance testing and shall submit a pretest report to the Engineer:
Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.
Verify activation of all flow switches.
. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
Open signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
Open and short (wire only) network communications and verify that trouble signals are received at network annunciators or reporting terminals.
Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
Ground signaling line circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
Ground notification appliance circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
Check alert tone and prerecorded voice message to all alarm notification devices.
. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using smoke test.
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.
When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.
. Perform the following tests for the public address/fire alarm system:
Simulate a fire condition using each of the following initiating devices in each zone: 1) manual pull station - waterflow switch 2) area smoke detector - projected beam smoke 3) heat detector - detector 4) duct smoke detector
After alarm verification time has exceeded ensure that proper voice institution messages are transmitted to the proper zone.
Simulate live voice announcements in all zones using All Call, All Call Minus, Page to Evac., and Page to Alert functions to ensure that proper voice instruction messages are transmitted to the proper zones. Stairways shall be on an independent zone separate from all other zones.
Test & Inspection
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 146 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
All intelligent analog addressable devices shall be tested for current address, sensitivity, and user defined message. All wiring shall be tested for continuity, shorts, and grounds before the system is activated. All test equipment, the installing contractor, shall make instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the tests available.
The system including all its sequence of operations shall be demonstrated to the Owner, his representative, and the local fire inspector. In the event the system does not operate properly, the test shall be terminated. Corrections shall be made and the testing procedure shall be repeated until it is acceptable to the Owner, his representatives and the fire inspector.
At the final test and inspection, a factory-trained representative of the system manufacturer shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in accordance with these specifications. The representative shall provide technical supervision, and participate during all of the testing for the system.
A letter from the Contractor certifying that the system is installed entirely in accordance with the system manufacturer's recommendations and that the system is in proper working order.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 147 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
B. PUBLIC ADRESS SYSTEM (P.A)
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION:
The objective is to have an effective public address and evacuation system for the entire area. The system will combine all the essential EVAC functionality- such as zone wise paging & voice evacuation, event logging, digital mixing & feedback cancellation, digital message management and a relay based fire alarm panel interfacing. The system shall monitor all the peripherals such as speakers & speaker circuits, amplifiers, battery, voice messages, microphones etc. The system shall fully comply with IEC / EN60849 and BS5839 part 8 standards . The same also should be comply NFPA 72 codes and Indian Standard IS 2189.
2. SCOPE :
The contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission a high quality fast-acting Public Address and Voice Alarm System and Professional Audio System complying strictly as per the satndards.
The system shall provide Paging announcements from microphone stations, emergency message from the in-built memory & simultaneous background music from CD/DVD/PC player in different zones. The system shall consiist of miminmum 8-button Paging security microphone (PSM) working on RS-485 protocol & balanced audio line transmission. The PSM will have built-in pre-amplifier & will be connected to Distributed amplifier unit (DAU) using CAT 5 or CAT 6 cable crimped by RJ 45 connector on both the sides.
The Public Address and Voice Evacuation System shall comprise of Audio Matrix Units, High quality speakers, Power SuppSpeakers, Musical Horn Speakers, Wall Mounted Speakers, Pro-Audio Input Plates, Automatic Gain Control Microphones, Audio rack all mounted on a suitable Rack and fully connected and integrated on the fire alarm loop as per the project requirement.
Prior to placing order for any equipment, the contractor shall submit comprehensive document comprising working drawings, catalogues and descriptive literature of components, acoustic calculation to meet with all relevent codes . The contractor shall be required to train and instruct client's personnel in the correct use, operation and supervision of the system, preferably prior to the handing over of the project. In order to ensure whole site integration capability, the fire and voice alarm system will be awarded to a single specialist local System Integrator who will be responsible for the design, global operation, management and interfacing of the system as defined in BS5839 part 1.
The contractor shall make sure that all power tapping of the speakers must be carried out as specified, even if the acoustic calculations indicates less power tapings. The back ground noise of the project shall be considered 80dBA. The contactor must endure minimum of 10dB above noise levels are achieved.
The system shall be fully programmed to accommodate fire alarm and voice communication zones as indicated on the drawings and schematics. The system shall be configured to allow on site modifications with the minimum of disruption using the PC based software to facilitate future changes or alterations to the buildings.
The System shall be capable of identifying the Evacuation Zones via Software, and shall be able to Page, Evacuate, Alert zones as required by the Cause and Effect of the Fire Alarm without any limitation to the number of zones.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 148 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
3.1 PAVA DSP MATRIX UNIT (PDMU)
The PDMU shall be a central control unit for PAVA system & shall be capable of being used for everyday background music and public announcement duties; with the fire alarm initiated emergency announcements overriding all other facilities.
Each PDMU shall be 4 IN & 4 OUT matrix & will cater to 4 zones. ( Number of Zones shall be designed as per the site requirements) PDMU shall have a staking capability for expansion of zones upto 256 by stacking 64 PDMUs together.
routing music with all the Professional Audio Library Functions of windows drag and drop such as Equalizers, Mixers, Auto Mixers, Fillers, Compressors, Crossovers, Feedback Killer, Gates, Delays. All these blocks shall come part of the GUI. The system shall be able to provide the AutoCAD of the building, and shall be easily able to drag and drop any of the controls, Mute Buttons, Volume Controls or any other control on the software to enable the user to easily control and route the 48 audio channels to any selected location as per the building map.
The PDMU along with entire Voice Evacuation and Public Address System shall be integrated with the Fire Alarm System and shall be sitting on the same Fire Alarm Loop. The PDMU along with amplifiers(system) shall be capable of sending messages automatically to any zone at any time interval, without affecting the music in the other areas.
The PDMU shall utilize the latest DSP (Digital Signal Processing) capabilities in order to perform high quality and site programming flexibility, as well providing high fidelity music over 32 audio channels
The PDMU shall play background / Foreground music and in case of Fire Alarm / Paging announcement, the system shall go to full power as programmed to provide the enough SPL levels to comply with BS5839 part8, with minimum of 10dB above the noise levels.
All system components shall be digitally monitored including and not limited to, Messages, Amplifiers, and back up amplifiers, Speaker Circuits, Audio Matrix units, Paging Microphone, Battery Charger and the 230VAC line. Each amplifier / line circuit shall be monitored individually and shall report any faults back to the Master Audio Matrix Unit as well as the CFM.
Each Zone and circuit speaker shall have separate amplifier, system sharing two amplifiers to multiple circuit speakers are not acceptable. There shall be one back up amplifier for every four amplifiers, the system shall automatically change over to the back up in case of any amplifier failure, and the back up amplifiers shall be monitored as well.
The PDMU can provide any Cause & Effect programs after integrating with the Fire Alarm System, thus Alert/Evacuate messages can be programmed and delayed as well as played on any zone / floor as per the Cause & Effect approved by the Engineer.
The Battery Back up shall provide 24 hours of back up and 30 min of alarm operation. The
Battery calculation must strictly comply with BS5839 part 8 and shall be based on the amplifier size and not the speaker circuit load.
PDMU will ensure the Initiation of voice alarm shall take immediate priority and shall cancel all other PA operations in that particular fire zone and shall not affect the music in other zones.The voice alarm system shall be capable of broadcasting pre-recorded emergency alarm messages and live speech in the event of fire detection system activating for up to 32 audio channels simultaneously. The systems shall be capable of broadcasting up
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 149 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
to twelve different pre-recorded messages to different zones or group of zones simultaneously.
In addition a FIRE DRILL, BOMB ALERT, EARTHQUAKE ALERT and an ALL CLEAR message shall be incorporated into the operation. If required the messages shall be recorded in the local languages e.g. Hindi, Marathi, Gujrati, Tamil Telgu etc. for making voice evacuation more efficient & user friendly.
Technical Specifications
0dB input / outputs 4 Nos per PDMU Audio input impedance: 10K Ohms Input sensitivity: 0dB Audio output impedance: 50Ohms Output levels 0dB Max input/output level +14 dBv Pass-band 10 Hz to 22KHz Sampling 48 kHz 24bit Distortion 0.02% to 1 KHz Output noise <84 dBu Lin, <88 dBu A-weighted Output dynamic >98dBu Lin, >102dBu A-weighted 100V Inputs/Outputs 4 Max power per Channel 500W, and four channel per AMS Amplifier gain measurement 1 kHz, 18 kHz Line impedance measurement 100V 1kHz, 18kHz Ground fault measurement Yes
3.2 CENTRAL FIRE MICROPHONE (CFM)
touch screen type and connected back to the control room, to monitor and control the entire PAVA system, as well to start/stop any music programs, page any zone via touch screen buttons, route any message to any zone as required. ThE CFM must be provided for redundancy. If the master fails, the other redundant microphone shall take over automatically and without any manual interference. The secondary CFM shall indicate the fault on the LCD of the microphone. Any button paging microphones or PC based paging console dose not comply with the above and hence deemed rejected.
CFM shall be configured either using a PC computer, or by using control keys and the front LCD screen of the PDMU module to which it is connected. Access can be password-protected. All parameters needed for site operating shall be programmed: zones assigned to the different buttons, name of zones, zone groups, priorities, access to different messages, levels adjustments, pre-call chime, press-to-talk, music ON/OFF and music routing. The LCD screen shall provides an overall view of busy zones and active sources. A VU meter controls the microphone presence and modulation level.
A CFM shall have a built-in loudspeaker makes it possible to listen to all system-generated messages and announcements. The CFM shall have fully monitored (microphone capsule, power supply, touch screen, audio and RS485 connections). Any system faults are detected, located and indicated clearly on the screen of CFM.
In case of any system component failure, the CFM shall override any defective unit and provide paging to the required zone.
When a touch screen CFM is operated, this shall override any automatic voice alarm signal being transmitted to the zone selected. The Alert and Evacuate pre-recorded messages will be maintained in other zones while live voice fire announcements are being broadcast to selected loudspeaker zones.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 150 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
3.3. Paging Security Microphone console (PSM)
The PSM shall consist of Unidirectional Condenser Addressable Microphone, compatible with UAP devices via RS485 protocol over a single CAT6 cable connection to transport both Audio and Power to the PSM from the UAP system. The unit comprise of 8 zones / 8 buttons with sleek Condenser Goose Neck Microphone, and spring metal protection, providing durability and excellent aesthetic look.
The PSM unit is fully addressable; each button can be assigned to different zone and up to 256 zones expansion via the additional Key-pad easy extension station. The buttons can be represent a single zone or group of zones and easily defined via the GUI of the UAP system via simple Matrix selection IN Windows based configuration software.
The Unit shall comprise its own Pre-amplifier and 128kB audio storage memory inside, allowing the unit to store Pre / Post Chime tones. These Wave Files Tones can be easily stored and downloaded via the UAP GUI (Graphic User Interface) software directly to the PSM.
The these shall allow the identification of selection / Busy signals for the user notification. All buttons shall be programmed with Drag & Drop features from the UAP GUI software and each button can be programmed for Push to Talk or Latch functionality.
The Unidirectional Condenser Microphone shall provide high quality directive pick up from the user and hence less interference from the surroundings.
The UAP system shall accommodate up to 32 PSM microphone on one UAP and up to 256 zones in total, the RS485 communication protocol will facilitate daisy chain of up to 1000m on a simple CAT6 cable, and yet making outlets easy to connect via a universally accepted standard RJ45 connectors.
3.4. Paging Microphone IP based console (PMIP)
The PMIP console will be directly fitted on the TCP/IP network either connected to switch or router. It shall bear its own static (manually configured) IP Address. The IP based PA system will use a Virtual LAN with static addresses for communication with amplifiers & microphone control consoled. The PMIP shall be used as a microphone directly communicating over IP -Ethernet interface including POE (Power On Ethernet). PMIP will consist of monitored high quality gooseneck microphone, Automatic gain control on microphone input. A Monitored built in loudspeaker for listening to transmission of audio messages to remote locations. The console will use SPEEX/MP3 audio encoding/decoding protocol for TCP/IP audio & data transmission. It shall have a Memory space for pre-recorded messages & a RJ9 plug for optional headset
Technical Specifications
Speaker: Power 4 Wrms, Bandwith 200 Hz-10 kHz Microphone Length 250 mms, bandwith 100 Hz-10 kHz Contact inputs Active to ground, voltage 3.3 VDC Relay outputs 48 VDC / 2A Housing Polystyren shock, UL94 self extinguishable, Color White / Grey / as per site requirement Serigraphy Yellow pantone 143C Power consumption (24 VDC) 1.7 W standby, 8 W max
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 151 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
3.5. TCP/IP Ethernet interface
The TCP/IP Ethernet interface unit shall be a core component in Audio IP Transmission & will be used as a bridge for IP integration Use of IP based PA system shall save a wiring as the IT infrastructure will be shared on the same backbone.
Technical Specifications
Power supply 24 VDC Audio Inputs 2 balanced audio 0 dB to -60 dB inputs Audio Outputs 2 balanced audio 0 dB outputs Audio Compression SPEEX/MP3 audio encoding/decoding Contacts 2 output contacts NO/NC Data RS232 interface (TX/RX/GND) Audio inputs max level +18 dB bandwidth 20 Hz-20 kHz Audio outputs max level +18 dBU bandwidth 20 Hz-20 kHz Contact inputs Active to ground, voltage 3.3 VDC Relay outputs 48 VDC/2 A Housing Polystyrene shock, UL94 self extinguishable, Color White / as per site requirement Serigraphy White / as per site requirement /Power consumption (24VDC): 1.7 W
3.6. 6 Watt Metal ceiling speakers
The celing mounted 6 W speakers shall be installed as depicted in the drawing. The speakers are finished in RAL 9016 color in stylish metal chassis. The speakers shall have terminals to allow selection of nominal full power, half power & quarter power. Assembly shall comprise of a twin cone loudspeaker and shall be fitted with a 6Watt / 100volt transformer. The loudspeaker baffle shall be a round two part bezel comprising an inner metal mesh grille, and chassis with integral loudspeaker having no visible fixings. Installation shall be by pre-mounted torsion-springs for False ceiling mounting. Loudspeaker shall have wide angle dispersion of Cone shall be a damped, high compliance type with a smooth extended frequency response of 100Hz~17.5 KHz. The speakers shall be very easy to install with mounting clamps . It shall have excellent frequency response with wide opening angle & inbuilt 100V line matching transformer. It should blend asthetically with interiors.
Technical Specifications
Rated power 6 W Tappings 100V line 6/3/1.5/0.75/0.25W Effective frequency range 70 ~ 17.5Khz SPL @ 1w/m (test signal 100Hz~10kHz) 90 dB S.P.L. ,@Full power/ 1m, dB 97 dB Axial Q Factor at 1k/2kHz 2.3/4.6 Colour White / as per site requirement Ceiling Cut-out 155 mm Dimensions 180 mm x 70 mm
3.7. Moulded cabinet wall-mount loudspeakers
The enclosure shall be ported and treated with UV inhibitors. The bowed grille will be manufactured from mild steel construction with an epoxy coated finish. The assembly of the speaker shall comprise of a 160mm diameter bass/midrange treated coned loudspeaker. It shall have in addition a 25mm Mylar dome tweeter complete with neodymium magnet and a factory fitted 6watt / 100 volt line transformer. The loudspeaker shall have wide-angle dispersion of 160° and a smooth extended frequency response of 160Hz ~20kHz. Sensitivity shall be a minimum of 96dB @ 1metre, 1watt test signal bandwidth 100Hz ~10kHz. Transformer shall be 100 volt line with 3dB power taps of 6, 3, 1.5, 0.75 and 0.25watts to be clearly marked on the assembly. The speaker shall be compliant to BS5839 part 8 (Voice Alarm Standard) to include all the above features with the addition of thermal fuse and ceramic terminals to take 2 x2.5mm² cables. Fire Rated cable tail must be fitted for full compliance to BS5839 Part 8. All units to be tested to BS6840 Part 5.
Technical Specifications
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 152 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Rated power 6 W Tappings 100v line 6/3/1.5/0.75/0.25 W Effective frequency range 160 ~18Khz SPL @ 1w/m (test signal 100Hz~10kHz) 96dB Dispersion at 1k/2kHz 180/120 Axial Q Factor at 1k/2kHz 3.6/5.8 Colour White / as per site requirement
3.8. W Horn Type Speakers
The Horn speaker unit shall have a 100-volt transformer sealed inside its high-strength, lightweight, ABS housing that is protected against the elements by molded-in UV inhibitors. Its wire enters the housing through a gland nut designed to keep the moisture out. Horns must have lightweight high-density, phenolic-resin diaphragms and ceramic magnets.
Mounting shall be using epoxy-coated, stainless steel U bracket held in place by stainless steel hardware allowing its position to be maintained despite unusually high wind velocity.
The Horn speaker should be tested in accordance to IEC60268 Part 5 for high quality intelligibility & shall comply to BS5839 part 8, hence fitted with ceramic terminals and thermal fuse. Unit shall consist of a weather-resistant ABS housing, high density phenolic resindiaphragm, internal 100-volt transformer, epoxy coated stainless steel mounting bracket, stainless steel hardware and 17 inches five conductor wire.
Technical Specifications
Rated power, Watts 10 W Tappings 100 volt line 10/5/2.5/1.25 W Transformer Impedance, Ohms, 100V 1k/2k/4k/8k Effective frequency range, Hz (BS6840) 400 8,000 S.P.L. @ 1m, 1 watt, dB, Test Signal Bandwidth 97dB S.P.L. @ Full power Octave Bandwidth, dB 107dB Dispersion at 1k/2kHz, Degrees 160 / 110 Directivity Axial Q factor, 1 k/2kHz 2.80 / 6.60 Dimensions, front & depth, mm Ø138 x 200 Colour/Finish Grey RAL7035 Material ABS plastic housing with UV inhibitors Mounting Stainless Steel U Bracket IP Rating 66
3.9. Amplifiers
The power amplifier shall be of high quality, suitable for the most demanding PA installations and applications. The unit shall have a frequency response of no less than 50Hz - 15kHz (±3dB). Distortion at 1kHz shall not exceed 0.5%. The Signal to Noise ratio shall be -82dB or greater. The amplifier shall have two transformer balanced XLR inputs, one of which can be used to feed additional power amplifiers. The amplifier shall be capable of delivering 120/240/480 watts RMS into 100 & 70 Volt or 4 ohm loads. Speaker connection shall be via a rear panel barrier strip. The unit shall operate from both AC mains power or from a 24V DC battery supply. The amplifier shall include a built-in trickle charge circuit. The amplifier shall feature overload and overdrive protection and shall also include cooling fans, which should only be active if the operating temperature exceeds a factory preset level. The unit shall be packaged in a rugged 2 RU metal chassis suitable for desk or rack mounting.
Rated Output Voltage(RMS) 120/240/480W Battery Voltage 24VDC(max 10% deviation) Frequency Response : 50Hz to 15KHz Impedance : 10KOhm S/N Ratio : >82 dB Sensitivity : Max 300mV(set at 1V)
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 153 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Total Harmonic Distortion : Less than0.5% @ 1kHz
3.10. Entertainment Rack
The equipment panel shall consist of 1 no. CD player & 1 no. AM/FM tuner. All music transmitted from this position will be routed through the Central Equipment rack to the zone / zones selected though complete windows based programming.
The equipment components shall comply with the following requirements:
3.10.1 FM/AM tuner
The tuner shall contain provision for up to six preset stations, two of which shall be dedicated to MW or LW. It shall have the following characteristics:
Sensitivity : 3uV for FM channels : 20uV for 26dBSNR for AM section Distortion : 1% THD IF rejection : 70db Nominal output : 100mV Antenna Impedance : 75 ohms Tuning method : Electronic, onsite adjustable with LED on station
Indicator
3.10.2 CD/DVD Player
The CD player shall be capable of loading up to six discs into a magazine to provide many hours of repeated play. All discs could be played sequentially or randomly by the use of a remote signal.
Frequency response : 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio : 90dB Distortion : 0.008 % THD @ 1 kHz Channel Separation : 82dB Quantization : 16-bit twin DAC
3.10.3. Equipment Rack
The equipment shall be housed in a standard rack of suitable height, with Plexiglas door or metal mesh and lock. Ventilation panels of 1U height shall be provided between each item of equipment.
Details of the proposed equipment shall be forwarded to the Consultant with performance specifications, dimensions, construction and finish for approval.
The site shall be fitted with man / machine interface terminal facilities, which shall allow live speech broadcasts to be addressed to selected areas of the site. The unit shall also allow initiation of stored messages and alarm signals.
3.11. Speaker Cables
All cables associated with PA System shall be of following specifications :
The 2 core speaker cable will be connected to the speakers by screw terminals before which it shall be crimped using 1.5 sq. mm. bootlace lugs. Care has to be taken for avoiding any single strand of wire shall not come out of Lug & screw terminals to avoid noise & leakage.
Flexible Copper Conductor of cross section 1.5 Sq. mm / 2.5 Sq.mm PVC insulated, PVC FRLS sheathed control Cable as per IS 694.
These Cables shall be laid in G.I. Conduits concealed/surface.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 154 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
4. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
BS 5839 part 8: Code of Practice for the design, installation and servicing of voice alarm systems EN60849: International Standards Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes BS 6259: Reinforcement of Pro-Audio Sytems with Voice Evacuation. IEC60268 Part 5: speaker rated power in compliance BS6840 Part 5: Speaker tested in accordance with. Speakers EASE, CATT and ULYSSES models for acoustical studies.
5. APPROVED MAKES
BOSE ATEIS PRESIDEO JBL
6. INSTALLATION:
Installation shall be as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.
All cables, junction boxes, cables supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas
TESTING:
Sr. No. Description Visual Test
Readings Documentation
1All cables are tested for continuity, insulation, resistance etc.
2 System installation proper as per drawing
3
Carry out visual checks on all speakers & Processors are free from any mechanical damage, cables, inter phase modules etc.to ensure they are properly installed.
4Check for proper termination of bootlace lugs & feruling
5 Check Input A/C Supply Voltage
6Check location / spacing of loudspeakers as in drawing.
7 Check Distribution of Zones as per Drawing.
8Check full load speaker sound quality & measure Sound pressure level (SPL) in dB.
9Check if local loudspeakers overrides by voice messages in case of emergency evacuation .
10
If power fails, whether Voice evacuation system is working on battery supply if yes for what time
11
Check if recorder messages are CLEAR, free from any noise distortion & easy to understand with Room acoustic speech transmission Index (RaSTI) value >0.5.
12 properly
13 Check for Microphone locations & the sensitivity by paging
14 Play a soft music & check sound quality
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 155 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
7. COMMISSIONING :
At final commissioning of each system, the Contractor shall confirm that:
All devices, control panels are tested and operate correctly .
The standby batteries are adequately sized. (Measurements of the quiescent and full loads shall be taken and compared to calculated values used at the design stage.) Calculations and measurements shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Commissioning shall be fully documented and the documentation submitted to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall demonstrate each zone and main panel to the satisfaction of the Engineer by conducting a series of witnessed acceptance tests as directed by the Engineer. This shall take place after the above final commissioning and following receipt of the commissioning documentation by the Engineer.
Both the installation and the commissioning activities shall be undertaken as a single continuous operation.
Upon completion of the installation activity, the contractor shall Test, Start-up, Commission and Handover the system to the customer.
The contractor shall make use of the following documents to record test results and details of commissioning tests:
Cable Test Sheets Installation Check Report System Layout Drawing(s) System Schematic Diagram(s)
The contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing the complete system.
The contractor shall present an Acceptance Certificate for signature by the customer.
8. DOCUMENTATION :
The contractor, upon completion of the commissioning activity, shall hand over the system to the customer.
At the time of hand over, the contractor shall provide the customer with the following documentation:
1. Copy of detailed report 2. Component and equipment list 3. Product description sheets 4. System design drawing(s) 6. System schematic diagram(s) 7. System operating manuals
9. HANDOVER :
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation and maintenance instruction manuals to the owner. All aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed, including wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system design, sequence of operation and drawing(s), illustrating control logic and equipment used in the system. Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, maintenance operations and procedures shall be included in the manual.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 156 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
10. TRAINING :
General
The contractor shall provide the customer with details of the training required by personnel to operate and maintain the PA System.
The Contractor and the customer shall jointly agree the number of staff to attend the training courses.
11. MAINTENANCE :
Routine maintenance should be carried out in accordance with relevant customers requirements. All performance checks undertaken should be recorded in the system log book.
As a minimum, the following performance checks must be undertaken on each maintenance visit. Carry out verification checks as detailed in the commissioning instructions.
Remove dust and dirt from the Control Panels/speakers using a soft brush or a lint cloth. A solvent which is harmless to the finishes of metal and plastic may be applied to more stubborn stains.
Examine the exterior of the enclosure for any signs of damage or loose cable glands and rectify any faults found.
Examine the printed circuit boards for signs of over heating, dry joints and/or damaged tracks.
Examine the battery terminals for secure connection and for any signs of corrosion. Replace or repair as required
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 157 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
C. SECURITY SYSTEM
1. CLOSE CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)
1.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
The CCTV System shall be real time system consisting of Day Night P/T/Z Cameras, indoor varifocal cameras, recorders, matrix and monitors.
1.2 SYSTEM OBJECTIVE
a. To enable the important areas of the premises to be remotely monitored.
b. To enable sensitive areas to be scanned from pre-selected position.
c. To enable automatic recording by Digital Multiplex Recorder on hard disk and to play back the recorded events on selected monitors & back-ups of the events on CD.
1.3 REAL TIME RECORDER
a. The system shall have the capability to handle 16 video inputs at real time, 400fps, IP enabled and 2 monitor outputs with a facility to have the control from the Security Control Centre.
b. It shall be capable to support PTZ controllers as required (Select camera view, multi-screen view)
c. It shall be possible to monitor the whole premises from the Security Control Room
d. Operator interface to the system shall be through keyboard / CCTV Control Panel in the Security Control.
e. It shall be possible to program multiple system features including functions such as monitor sequence, camera dwell, camera tour, by-pass and restore cameras and alarms.
The system shall have high speed operation, automatic reboot from power loss, automatic configuration down loading.
g. The system shall be capable of displaying the system status on high resolution monitor.
h. The system programming shall be password protected and shall have different levels of passwords for programming.
k. All cameras and the integrated CCTV System equipment shall be designed for continuous operation.
1.4 CCTV CAMERAS
a. The camera shall employ complete solid-state circuitry, ensuring high operational reliability. The cameras being considered for this project shall be both monochrome & coloured with one-third imager size.
b. The camera shall deliver well defined, clear, high resolution, B&W/ Colour picture without lag or geometric distortion.
c. The camera shall also possess the following features:
- Excellent sensitivity for usable picture suited to the ambient light level conditions and its variations. A high sensitive automatic light compensation circuit ensuring constant video signal independent of wide variations in light levels.
- High resolution
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 158 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
- Low power consumption
- Phase adjustable line lock facility or with internal crystal oscillator
d. The camera unit shall be complete with all electronic circuitry, devices, components, standard mount for lenses, mounting assemblies etc. The mounting assemblies of the cameras shall be individually selected depending upon the special requirements as per actual site conditions. Focal length of lens for cameras to be atleast 4 mm.
e. Equipment specification for indoor dome camera (Monochrome)
Imager : 1/3" Interline transfer CCD
Signal System : PAL
Resolution : More than 400 TVL
Pixel : 510 (H) x 582(V)
Scanning system : 2:1 interlaced
Scanning Frequency : Horizontal 15.63KHz Vertical 50.00Hz
Operating Temperature : 0 ~ 40 deg. C 32 ~ 104 deg. F
Relative Humidity : 10 ~ 75% (there should be no condensation)
Storage Temperature : -5 ~ 55 deg. C 23 ~ 131 deg. F
Storage Humidity : 10 ~ 95%
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 160 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
1.5 DIGITAL MULTIPLEXER RECORDER
a. Digital Video Multiplex Recorder shall be capable of multiplexed recording of upto 16 video inputs.
b. It shall be capable to provide time, date, ID number and description for each camera input. Titling displays shall be either black or white.
c. The multiplexer shall offer selectable live multi-screen displays while recording into a 2.4 TB hard disc @ 25 frames / second. The digital multiplex recording shall not be interrupted by live multi-screen viewing, even search or playback and arching to external devices. In time lapse mode (24hr.) the recording shall be 7.5 frames / second.
d. The Multiplex Recorder shall have auto camera detect feature so that when multiplex recorder is powered up the no. of cameras connected to the system can be easily identified.
e. The Multiplex Recorder shall have automated scheduling facility which shall include options like.
Alarms on / off Activity on / off Cameras to record Record rate for continuous alarm and activity recording.
f. The Multiplex Recorder shall have unique event search facility. The facility shall include
Quick review of each listed in a thumbnail screen. Filter events by event type, time, date and camera Play any event from list full screen Copy selected events to external device.
g. Each video input shall be capable of being monitored for presence of video / video synchronization.
1.6 CCTV MONITORS
a. The monitors shall be suitable for the highest level of quality control. These shall provide reliable, high resolution video viewing in the most demanding security applications. Under scan shall be available, brightness, contrast, vertical hold, horizontal hold and power ON/OFF shall be to standards.
b. The minimal equipment specification for alarm monitor is as follows (Monochrome):
i) Size : 20"
ii) Picture tube : 440 CWB4(Q)
iii) Deflection : 90°
iv) Input signal : 1.0+0.5 Vp-p
v) Input impedance : 75 ohm switchable
vi) Resolution : More than 700 lines
vii) Video bandwidth : 10 MHz
viii) Video Input/Output : 1.0+0.5 Vp-p
ix) AFC time constant : Corrected for use with Helical Scan VTRs
x) Viewing area : 20" Diagonal
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 161 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
xi) Scanning system : CCIR Standard
xii) Input voltage : 220-230 V AC, 50 Hz, single phase
Frequency : 4.433618 Mhz +/- 400 Hz (room temperature) Horizontal Frequency Stability : +/- 500 Hz
Vertical Frequency Stability : +/- 4 Hz
High Voltage : 25 kV +/- 1.5 kV
Convergence display : less than 0.1 mm (at the centre of area)
Power Consumption : 75 Watts (maximum)
Operating Humidity Condition : 0 to 90%
Operating Temperature
Range : 0 to 40 deg. C
Audio : 2 Watts
1.8 VIDEO CO-AXIAL CABLES
a. Co-axial cable of the following minimum specification shall be used indoor in conduits, trunking and cable trays.
i) Type : RG 59/U
ii) Impedance : 75 Ohms
iii) Conductor (dia) : 20 AWG Solid Bare Copper
iv) Insulation : Cellular Polyethylene
v) Nominal O.D. : 0.242"
vi) Shielding : 95% Bare Copper Braid
vii) Jacket : Black Frame Retardant PVC
viii) Nominal Velocity of prop. : 78%
ix) Nominal Attenuation : MHz db/100 ft
10 1.0 50 2.1
100 3.0 200 4.5 400 6.6 900 10.1 1000 10.9
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 163 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
1.9 VIDEO MATRIX SWITCHER
A. The Video Matrix Switch (VMS) shall consist of software and hardware components that provide monitoring and control of the video surveillance of a protected premise. The VMS shall be capable of providing video surveillance of multiple premises and operating with or without the VMS PC connected to the hardware components. The VMS shall be capable of monitoring alarm inputs and controlling relay outputs, and of being integrated with other building control systems. Modular hardware architecture shall allow maximum versatility for tailoring secure and dependable video surveillance solutions for all size facilities.
B. The VMS shall be designed to be fully scalable, offering capabilities and capacities to support a wide variety of applications. The VMS, in a single CPU system, accept 160 inputs and 48 outputs
racks. (To be specified as per project)
C. All operating characteristics of the system shall be contained in the VMS CPU and shall not require the presence of a PC for the continued operation of the system.
D. The VMS shall be designed to specifically address a high-density, compact size thus reducing the amount of space required and minimizing the number of interconnections.
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. VMS Configuration Software.
1. Shall be 32-bit application software and shall be compatible with Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, and 2000. It shall provide easy-to-use programming for system configuration. The configuration software shall allow the operator to manage the VMS by communicating with a single VMS CPU. It shall be permissible to use multiple copies of the configuration software, without special license or software keys.
2. It shall be required to log on by entering a unique password. 3. The VMS shall use a 32-bit, ODBC-compliant, Borland Paradox 7.0 database. 4. The configuration software shall enable the Administrator to edit operating parameters as described
in this specification. 5. Entering data into the required fields shall perform database edits. Interactive Help text shall be
available for operator prompt. 6. For ease of system configuration, it shall be possible to enter parameters directly into the database
table.
B. System Configuration shall include, but not be limited to, and the following functions:
1. System Size it shall be possible to set parameters for the system size to reduce the amount of time for upload/download of database. Sizing shall be possible for Video Inputs, Audio Inputs, Video Outputs, Audio Outputs, Users, Keyboards, Alarm Inputs, Sequences, Groups, and Scenes.
2. Communications it shall be possible to set the communication port and applicable speed, or to select a network address directly from the configuration window.
3. Installer Notes there shall be a notepad allowing the installer or system administrator the capability of adding notes at all relevant parts of the system configuration including, but not limited to, System Configuration, Inputs, Outputs, Alarms, Users, Keyboards, Time of Day Schedule Events and Sequences.
4. Video Inputs it shall be possible to: a. Select a different logical number for a physical input thus allowing for a different logical order than the arrangement of the physical inputs. b. Select the type of input Static Camera, High-speed Dome, or PTZ telemetry receiver. c. Select an Audio Input that will be switched at the same time that the Video Input is switched. d. Enable a Video Loss event and associate this with a Sequence. e. Enable a Video Restore event and associate this with a Sequence. The sequences for the Video Loss and Video Restore events shall be different sequences. f. Assign a title to the input. The title shall be, at minimum, 24 characters and its position on-screen shall be selectable. Selections for the characters shall include size, brightness, and foreground/background framing.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 164 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
5. Video Outputs it shall be possible to: a. Select a different logical number for a physical output thus allowing for a different logical order than the arrangement of the physical outputs. b. Select an Audio Output that will be switched at the same time that the Video Output is switched.
6. Scenes shall consist of four Views. Each View may be configured for a specific camera and/or a specific preset. Specific Audio Inputs may be associated with each View. The Scenes shall be named.
7. Groups shall be associated with up to 128 Scenes. The Groups shall be named; and this name shall appear on the keyboard LED display when Groups are selected.
8. Alarm Inputs shall be associated with a physical input. Physical inputs shall be terminations on the main Input/Output terminals or on remotely located I2C Input/Output terminals. There shall be up to 256 Alarm Inputs. a. It shall be possible to enable/disable the alarm. b. It shall be possible to enable the alarm to activate on contact opening and associate this event with a Sequence. c. It shall be possible to enable the alarm to activate on contact closing and associate this event with a Sequence.
9. Users shall be configured to restrict access and shall be: a. Assigned a unique password. b. Individually enabled or disabled. c. Assigned a date on which the privileges will expire. d. Assigned to specific functions, which shall include/exclude PTZ control, editing presets, VCR control and controlling Sequences. e. Restricted as to which inputs, outputs, and keyboards they may have access.
10. Keyboards each keyboard shall be configured to restrict access. a. Security shall be enhanced by implementing the rule that access levels be created for both the User and the Keyboard. Camera access and monitor access shall be set up BOTH for users and keyboard control locations. At the time that a user logs in, the system shall combine the access level (camera and monitor) for the user and the logged-in keyboard location. This combined access level shall limit which matrix switch operations shall be allowed. b. Keyboards shall be assigned a priority. Keyboards of a higher priority shall have precedence over keyboards of lower priority. c. Keyboards shall be capable of being assigned a dedicated monitor in addition to the monitor selected by the user. Every video switch operation performed on the keyboard will additionally cause the input to be copied to the dedicated monitor. d. Keyboards may be assigned to specific functions, which shall include/exclude PTZ control, editing presets, VCR control, and controlling Sequences. e. Keyboards shall be restricted as to which inputs, outputs, and keyboards they may provide access.
11. User-Defined Keys can be programmed to initiate a Sequence or call-up a Group/Sequence. 12. Time of Day events shall be configured to automatically initiate a Sequence.
a. The event shall be named and shall be: 1) Programmed to operate on any selected day of the week, everyday, weekends only, or
weekdays only. 2) Initiated at a specific and selectable Time of Day. 3) Prioritized such that an event of higher priority has precedence. 4) Enabled or disabled without changing the Time of Day parameters.
13. Text Messages of up to 24 characters shall be configured and shall be used for display on keyboards or on-screen displays. It shall be possible to simultaneously display multiple text messages using on-screen displays.
14. Sequences shall be configured and shall be available for use by the system on Event/Action, Time of Day schedule, or Manual Command. a. There shall be a minimum of 1024 sequences available. b. There shall be a minimum 25 steps available in each sequence. c. Each step shall consist of a command selected from a list of available commands. The commands shall cover all aspects of system operation and shall include conditional commands. Each step shall consist of multiple parameters.
15. Downloading it shall be possible to download parts of, or all, the database from the Configuration Software to the VMS CPU.
16. Uploading it shall be possible to upload parts of the database from the VMS CPU to the Configuration PC.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 165 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
SYSTEM CHASSIS A. Matrix Chassis. 1. The
depth. 2. The chassis shall be manufactured from stainless steel. 3. The chassis shall be accommodating the VMS modules, which shall include, CPU Module, Video
Input Modules (VIM), Video Output Modules (VOM). 4. The modules shall be position independent and shall be:
a. Removed and replaced with power on the system hot swappable. b. Easily installed or removed from the front of the chassis.
5. Include ventilating fans to ensure operating reliability in ambient temperatures of up to 40 degrees Celsius.
6. A backplane shall distribute power, control signals and video/audio signals, and shall support 64 Video/Audio (mixed) signals (Video/Audio Outputs).
7. Field Termination Panels shall be mounted on the rear of the chassis. 8. Matrix Chassis Power Supply.
a. The Matrix Chassis Power Supply (power supply) shall provide unregulated DC power for distribution through the backplane to the installed modules. b. The power supply shall be connected directly to an Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) on the main building power. c. The power supply shall have connections to allow the system to be powered from an additional power source, either 12 to 24 VAC or 12 to 30 VDC. d. The power supply shall include front LED display for backplane Transmit and Receive data, Reset status, and Video Synchronization. e. The power supply shall include the capability to generate video synchronization or to be externally synchronized.
B. Video Matrix System CPU. 1. The VMS shall be controlled by a single CPU. 2. The Operating System program shall be stored in the CPU, and shall not require the presence of a PC
for operation. 3. All configuration data shall be stored in non-volatile memory and shall be retained through power-
loss for up to 1 month. 4. The CPU shall include a watchdog timer and supply voltage monitor to automatically restart the
system in the event of supply brownouts. 5. The CPU shall include communication ports:
a. An RS232 port for connectivity to CCTV Server. b. An RS232 port for connectivity to a third party system, such as Access Control, to allow for control of the VMS from that third party system. c. A minimum of two (2) RS422 ports that shall connect to various keyboards or control devices. These ports shall use the native protocol of the VMS.
6. The CPU shall include an Alarm/Relay Termination Box (ATB). a. The ATB shall accept up to 32 potential free change-of-state inputs from connected devices. b. The ATB shall provide 4 Relay Outputs. The relays shall be rated at 30 VDC at 1 amp or 24 VAC at 0.5 amp.
7. The CPU shall include a diagnostic mode that shall be available without the requirement for attached computers or special tools. a. A BNC (Bayonet Neill Concellman) connector on the CPU shall allow connection to a video monitor and the diagnostic screens shall be displayed on this monitor. b. Pushbuttons on the CPU shall allow access to select various diagnostic screens. c. The diagnostic screens shall display real-time information of system configuration, baud rates, video input present, matrix switching (input to output), alarm input status, keyboard status, and other configurations.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 166 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Keyboards with Joystick. 1. The Keyboards shall be located as specified by the owner and shall provide full control of the matrix
switching, Pan Tilt Zoom (PTZ) control, control of Multiplexers, and other devices. 2. The Keyboards shall connect to the system using RS422 communication and may be connected either
locally or remotely. 3. The Keyboards shall receive power from the VMS CPU or shall be powered from local power
supplies depending on the configuration. 4. The Keys shall be positive action with a distinctive operator tactile feedback. 5. The Keyboard shall be equipped with multiple system-defined function Keys for the control of
Multiplexers and DVRs. Configuration software shall be provided to modify these keys for specific models and manufacturers.
6. Keyboard shall be capable to control matrix and DVR simultaneously.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions The VMS shall be designed to meet the following environmental
conditions: 1. Storage Temperature shall be designed for a storage temperature of -102. Operating Temperature shall be designed for an operating temperature of 03. Humidity - shall be designed for normal operation in a 0-80% non-condensing relative humidity environment. 4. Electromagnetic Interference The system shall meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Part 15, Class B devices, FCC Part 68, and IEC EMC directive.
1.10 MONOCHROME CAMERA
circuitry. The camera shall deliver clear, high resolution monochrome picture without geometric distortion.
The Camera shall comply with the enclosed specifications
1.11 LENSES
The lenses shall be Fixed/Motorized Zoom lens type. The lens should not be made from plastic. The zoom lenses shall be remote controlled and all the lenses shall be of auto iris type with internal spot filter.
1.12 WEATHER PROOF HOUSING
The Housing shall be made of extruded aluminum and weather proof to IP 66. It shall have demister, sun shield internal and external fan for cooling. The minimum internal dimensions of the housing shall be 400 x 110 x 95mm and shall be capable of housing the camera and zoom lens.
Housings suitable for Indoor applications shall also be provided by the bidder.
1.13 PTZ UNIT
The PTZ camera shall be with 36 X optical zoom for outdoor applications and 18X optical zoom for indoor applications. The digital zoom shall be 12 X in each case. The lux level sensitivity for indoor cameras shall be 1 lux in case if indoor camera and 0.1 lux in case of outdoor camera. The camera shall be aesthetically pleasing, compact and amazingly powerful and shall include high performance
onal Pan/Tilt / Zoom mechanism with 8X Zoom facility.The dome unit shall operate over 358 deg pan rotation and 90 deg tilt. It shall be possible to execute the two movement at different speed which the operator can determine. It shall be possible to program 64 preset positions which can be stored and recalled both manually and automatically.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 167 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Alternative II (IP SOLUTION)
1. LAYER -2 MANAGEABLE SWITCH
Number of ports 24 Nos. 10/100 base-TX RJ45 ports 2 Combo 1000 base T/SFP with 1 No single mode 1000 base Fiber LX duplex port module
Switch Fabric 8.8 Gbps Packet forwarding 6.6 Mbps Transmission Method Store and forward MAC Address Table 8 K entries per device MAC Address learning Dynamic entries : automatic update, static
entries : user defined Packet Buffer Memory 16 Mbytes per device Power Supply AC 230 V @ 50 Hz
2. LAYER -3 MANAGEABLE SWITCH
Number of ports 8 Nos single mode 1000 base . Fiber LX duplex port module (16 ports)converge Fibre cable from Encode L2 Switches and existing Lan) 12 Nos 10/100/1000 base TX RJ 45 port to connect to L2 switch uplinkand NVR box
Switch Fabric 48 Gbps Packet forwarding 35 Mbps Transmission Method Store and forward MAC Address Table 16 K entries per device Packet Buffer Memory 16 Mbytes per device Power Supply AC 230 V @ 50 Hz
3. NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER(NVR) /NETWORK ATTACHED STORAGE(NAS)
NVR/NAS box should be used to record the video streams which are viewed and monitored. The video streams should be recorded based on the control settings assigned by the administrator using video Surveillance control software. Control Room and other clients should be able to access the recorded video streams. The NVR/NAS should support simultaneous play back and recording at full duplex operation
It shall provide a high quality recording storage and play back of images. It should support integration with LAN to provide Centralized Management and shall operate on Windows/ Linux O/S. Support of user management for security level control and authentication required. This NVR/NAS boxes should have the following features and specifications.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 168 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
(Network Time Protocol), SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol), DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) and DNS (Domain Name System/Service).
Secured Administration Access Administrator can use Secure Sockets Layer to Connect the NVR and Configure NVR to Respond Only to SSL for Configuration.
Drive Status / Space Monitoring Supported Network Client Support Microsoft Windows, Linux Power supply AC 230 V @ 50Hz
OR
NAS Capacity to be decided by the vendorThe specifications for each unit are as follows: Onboard CPU Xeon 3.0 GHz Dual processor capable or greater Onboard Memory 2 GB DDR SDRAM HD Drive IDE/SATA/SCS @7200rpm with RAID 5 Host Interface Dual Gigabit Ethernet Network Transport Protocols TCP/IP, IPX (Internet work Packet Exchange) Network File Protocols CIFS (Common Internet File System),
NFS (Network File System), HTTP/HTTPS, FTP, NTP (Network Time Protocol), SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol), DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) and DNS (Domain Name System/Service).
Secured Administration Access Administrator can use Secure Sockets Layer to Connect the NVR and Configure NVR to Respond Only to SSL for Configuration.
Drive Status / Space Monitoring Supported Network Client Support Microsoft Windows/ Linux
Power supply AC 230 V @ 50Hz
6. PCs FOR VIDEO SURVEILLANCE ADMINISTRATION / CLIENT SOFTWARE
FEATURES DESCRIPTION
Processor Intel Dual Core Pentium D Processor 3.2 Ghz with EM 64 Technology
Memory 1 GB (2 x 512 mb) dual channel DDR2 533 memory, Upto 8 GB Max. memory expandable through four DIMM slots
Cache (External) 2 x 2 MB L2 Cache
ROM 512 MB Flash ROM, Can be upgraded from a diskette
Expansion Bus 2nos PCI Express (x1), 4nos 32 bit PCI slots, 33 MHz PCI 2.2 slots, 1-graphics slot
Graphic Accelerator N-vidia Quadro FX 4400(DVI/VGA)with 512 MB Memory with dual monitor capable graphics card
Hard Disk 160 GB 7.2K rpm SATA hard disk
Power Supply 375 W switchable/50 Hz with dual power supply provisions
Operating System Supports Windows XP, OS/2 Warp, Windows NT, DOS 6.22
Software WindowsXP Professional and Windows 2000, Microsoft Internet Explorer
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 169 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Power Management EPA compliant
Desktop Manager Based on SNMP protocol
Antivirus Software PC-Cilin or equivalent pre-loaded
Diagnostic Software PAQ 95 or equivalent pre-loaded
Network Broad cam 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet adapter NetworkInterface Card with wake on LAN support
Interfaces 1 parallel, 8 USB 2.0, 1 serial, 2 Ultra ATA/100,2 optional IEEE1394, 1 PS/2 Keyboard, 1 PS/2 Mouse, 1 video, 1 Microphone jack, 1 Line-in jack, 1 RJ-45, 1 Headphone jack & 1 line-out jack (analog/SPDIF digital
Audio Card Integrated AC 97/16 bit Stereo full-duplex and integrated speaker
Mouse Cordless Mouse
Monitor Monitors shall be with a minimum 19 inch color TFT flat panel display.
CD DVD Writer DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive with speakers
7. PC FOR VIDEO WALL DISPLAY
CPU Pentium® 4 Dual Processor 3.2 GHz, 800FSB, 512KC
Mother Board Intel Original Mother Board Memory 1 GB DDR RAM Hard Drives 80 GB IDE @ 7200RPM CD-Rom Drive 52x AGP slot 1 Network Adapter (NIC) Integrated 10/100/1000 Base TSound Card In- Built PCI slots Min 6 nos. on mother board USB 2 nos. at front panel Keyboards Cordless Keyboard Mouse Cordless Mouse Operating system Windows 2000/XP
8. LCD MONITORS for VIDEO WALL
Picture tube Aspect ratio 16:9 Resolution 1024 x 768 System PAL Input VGA port Operating voltage AC 180-230 V, 50 Hz
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 170 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
9. DIGITAL VIDEO SURVIELLANCE SERVER CONTROL SOFTWARE
A GENERAL
1 The Network Video Management System shall be a software based solution running on standard off-the-shelf computer server and communicating over Ethernet network using the TCP/IP network protocol.
2 The proposed solution shall not require proprietary computer hardware.
3 The proposed solution shall be based on Windows 2003 Server Operating System or higher.
4 The NVMS shall be designed as a distributed architecture for a fully redundant operation. The following redundancies shall be basic features of NVMS.
a) Redundant recording shall be a basic feature of the NVMS
b) Failover recording capabilities shall be a basic feature of the NVMS
c) Distributed recording capabilities shall be a basic feature of the system
d) Distributed main Database shall be a basic feature of the system. The system shall not be based on a single database and rather on a database failover architecture.
5 The NVMS system shall be based on the latest in software programming technology and shall be based on Microsoft .NET frame work.
6 The NVMS system shall support both analog and IP cameras
7 Support of analog cameras shall be done using Camera Encoder Video Servers and shall not require the installation of video capture cards
a) The NVMS shall support both NTSC and PAL video formats
b) The NVMS shall support video both from analog and IP fixed color/B&W cameras, PTZ/Dome cameras, infrared cameras, X-Ray cameras, low light/IR cameras, and any other camera that provides a composite NTSC/PAL 1v p-p video signal.
8 The NVMS shall support multiple Video Servers (Encoders) and Monitor Decoders technologies to interface with analog cameras and PTZ domes.
a) The NVMS shall support the JPEG video format
b) The NVMS shall support the M-JPEG video format
c) The NVMS shall support the MPEG-4 video format
d) The NVMS shall support the MPEG-2 video format
e) The NVMS shall support all the above video compressions simultaneously.
9 The NVMS shall sustain full operation using CIF, 2CIF, VGA, 4CIF and Megapixel video resolutions
a) The NVMS shall be able to support all cameras at the maximum frame rate and the maximum resolution while maintaining less than 80% load on the Server
10 The NVMS in addition to Video shall provide full Audio monitoring and recording functionality
11 The NVMS shall allow for 2-way audio communication using the audio interface
a) The NVMS shall provide the ability to communicate back to an audio enabled Encoder, Decoder or IP camera and provide an IP based Intercom
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 171 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
12 The NVMS Audio function shall be available as independent sources and/or synchronized with video
a) The NVMS shall allow the use of audio inputs for Audio recording of telephone lines, microphones, radio systems or any other analog audio interface.
b) The NVMS shall allow for audio search by date, time and alarm event with or without association to video.
13 The NVMS video storage shall be capable of storing forty (40) cameras on each of the video archive servers each at 30 images per second NTSC/ 25 PAL, at 704x480 NTSC and 704x576 PAL video resolution.
14 The NVMS shall be based on the TCP/IP communication protocol between all IP cameras, camera Encoders, monitor Decoders, Network Video Management Software and Media Storage Servers
a) The NVMS shall also support the UDP/IP network protocol. 15 The NVMS storage system shall be based on advanced recording methods and shall not rely
on the Windows Operating System to manage the storage.
16 The NVMS shall provide the coactivity to an external storage system
17 The NVMS storage option as a minimum shall provide RAID-5 redundancy
18 All storage redundancy and mirroring capabilities shall be done using hardware interface and shall not rely on the Windows Operating System to perform these functions
19 The network based video recorder server (Media Storage Server) shall as a minimum provide multi-video compression support in addition to the base MPEG-4 and shall simultaneously record video from MPEG-2, MPEG-4 video , Jpeg and M-Jpeg image compression algorithm standards.
20 The NVMS shall allow for specific cameras to be set at the most optimized recording technique, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, J-PEG or M-JPEG, and should be available for live monitoring and recording signals.
21 The system shall be flexible and as a minimum the compression scheme shall be able to run in one of several bandwidth selections. Bandwidth options shall include but not be limited to:
22 The system shall allow the recording, live monitoring, playback of archived video audio, and data simultaneously
23 The NVMS shall allow the user to view live video at 30 fps NTSC/ 25 PAL while recording at a lower frame rate for more efficient video storage.
24 The NVMS shall allow the user to view live video at High resolution 4CIF while recording at a lower CIF or 2CIF for more efficient video storage.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 172 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
25 The NVMS client application shall support multiple flat panel monitors to be connected to a single computer.
a) Each monitor shall have independent controls and shall support multi views up to 16 real time camera views.
26 The NVMS client application shall allow each user with the ability to view 32 cameras on a single PC all at 30fps NTSC/ 25 PAL
a) The system shall maintain the capability to add additional flat panel monitors for other applications.
27 The NVMS shall provide unlimited analog video outputs through the IP monitor Decoders.
28 The NVMS shall provide the user with the ability to fully control the system using PC based keyboard or mouse.
29 The NVMS shall offer a plug and play type hardware discovery service with the following functions:
a) Automatically discover devices as they are attached to the network
b) Discover devices on different network segments including the Internet and across routers.
30 The NVMS shall provide a reporting utility for tracking but not limited to the following options. Video and images shall be stored with reports for documenting events.
a) Alarms
b) Incidents
c) Operator logs
d) Service requests
31 The IP Based NVMS shall provide file export tool for export of single frames of video in J-PEG and BMP file formats and for export of motion video files in AVI file format for transport and playback on computers utilizing a Windows environment
32 The NVMS shall allow for each of the system Media Storage Servers to be set for fail over recording or redundant recording independently.
33 The NVMS database and video storage shall be based on SQL Server 2000 or better
34 The NVMS database shall be design as a distributed architecture and shall not introduce a single point of failure.
a) All database information shall be stored in multiple locations simultaneously and shall not require manual or automated synchronization.
35 The IP Based NVMS shall allow for installation of Anti-Virus and network security Software
36 The NVMS shall be based on a client server architecture.
B NVMS SERVER SOFTWARE
1 The NVMS software shall consist of an MS-SQL based Main Server Database Server, Media Storage Server (audio and video storage), Digital Virtual Matrix, Internet Video Broadcasting Server, Incident Reports, Alarm Management, Network Management System and Watchdog modules
2 The NVMS SQL based Database Server shall offer the capability to be installed on multiple servers to enable distributed architecture on the LAN or WAN
3 The NVMS Database Servers shall not limit the number of Media Storage Servers which can be networked together to form a distributed video management and recording system
4 The NVMS Database Server shall maintain a catalog of settings for all the clients, servers, encoders, decoders and IP cameras in the system
a) The Server shall enable the client to dynamically create connections between Encoders and Decoders and view live or recorded video on the digital VGA monitors (audio, video, serial ports and digital I/Os)
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 173 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
b) The Server shall provide the client seamless operation of all Encoders and Decoders available in the system regardless of the actual connection to different archive servers.
c) The Server shall detect signal loss and have the capability to alert the systems administrator
d) The Server shall receive all incoming events (motion detection and triggered digital input and relay output) in the system and take appropriate actions based on user-defined event/action relationships.
e) The Server shall create an audit trail of all events and user activities.
f) The Server shall perform dynamic bandwidth management.
g) The Server shall authenticate users and give access to the NVMS Monitor Client application based on predefined user access rights.
5 The NVMS Media Storage Server shall offer the capability to be installed multiple servers software on multiple Computer Servers to enable distributed archiving architecture on the LAN or WAN
6 The NVMS shall provide a Failover Server Database Server module for system redundancy
a) The Failover Server shall synchronize its configuration database with the main Server database.
b) The Failover Server shall take over the NVMS main Server operations in the event there is network or main Server failure.
c) The NVMS shall support multiple Server failovers.
d) The NVMS shall allow for each of the system Failover Directories to operate independently.
7 The NVMS Media Storage Server shall support all camera connections indicated in BOQ, through video Encoders or IP cameras, all recording at 30fps NTSC/ 25PAL
8 The NVMS shall record all video from all cameras, Encoders and IP cameras, in the native video format of each (e.g. Mpeg-4, MPEG-2 or M-Jpeg video compressions)
9 The NVMS shall record all video in real time simultaneously at bandwidth ranging from 8 Kb/sec to 4 Mb/sec, frame rates ranging from 1fps to 30fps NTSC/25PAL and resolution ranging from CIF (352X240 NTSC, 352x288PAL) to 4CIF (704X480 NTSC, 704x576PAL).
10 The NVMS shall be able to set each camera frame rate, bit rate and resolution independently from other cameras in the system, and altering these settings shall not affect the recording and display settings of other cameras.
a) The NVMS shall utilize multicast network communication for video monitoring.
i Unicast based equipment will not be considered as an approved equal for alternate system
11 The NVMS shall require no proprietary hardware for video and audio recording servers.
12. The NVMS shall not utilize any hardware or software multiplexer or time-division technology for video or audio recording and monitoring.
13 The NVMS shall provide a Failover Media Storage Server module for system redundancy
a) The Failover Archive Server shall synchronize its configuration database with the Server Database Server.
b) The Failover Archive Server shall take over the NVMS Archive Server operations in the event there is any system Archive failure.
c) The NVMS shall support multiple Media Storage Server failovers.
d) The NVMS shall allow for each of the system Failover Archive Server to operate independently.
14 The NVMS shall provide a Redundant recording module for system redundancy
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 174 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
a) The redundant recording shall record all video in multiple server, mirroring recording, and shall synchronize all setup and configuration databases with the mirrored server(s).
b) The NVMS shall support multiple redundant recording servers.
c) The NVMS shall allow for each of the system Media Storage Server to be set for redundant recording independently.
15 The NVMS shall support a built-in Digital Video Matrix Switcher
a) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall provide a full matrix operation of IP video to analog output.
b) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall provide a full matrix operation of IP video to digital monitors.
c) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall have the capability of creating camera sequences with the following functionalities:
i Each Sequence shall have capability upto 500 cameras.
ii Each camera in the sequence shall have its own individual dwell time, from 1 to 60 seconds.
iii Each entry in a sequence shall have the capacity to trigger PTZ camera presets, patterns or auxiliaries.
iv Multiple users shall be able to view the same camera sequence simultaneously, not necessarily synchronized one with the other
d) The NVMS Virtual Matrix Switch shall have the capability to create and execute Visual Basic (VB) or .NET scripts on events or on schedules.
e) The NVMS Virtual Matrix Switch Macros shall give the Server Services the capacity to perform the following:
i Interface with Access Control Systems
ii Interface with Point of Sale Systems
iii Interface with Alarm Systems
iv Interface with Process Control Systems
v Interface with Building Management Systems
vi Automate user/client operations
f) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall have the capacity to interface with legacy video walls via a CCTV keyboard connected to Encoder, Decoder or the client PC
16 The NVMS shall support an Internet Video Broadcast server (IVB)
a) The IVB shall act as a proxy for NVMS client, Media Storage Servers and web based clients connecting to the NVMS system via the Internet.
b) The IVB shall act as a Gateway for network topologies that restrict a client from receiving the multicast UDP video and audio streams directly from the Encoder/Decoder,
i The IVB shall communicate the streams via a unicast, UDP or TCP transmission protocol.
17 The NVMS shall support video motion detection module
a) The NVMS Media Storage Server shall perform Video Motion detection on each individual camera based on a grid of 1320 motion detection blocks.
b) The NVMS Media Storage Server motion detection shall allow for multi zone masking.
i It shall either be set to full screen, one zone (all 1320 block activated), or a custom motion mask can be configured with multiple zones by selecting any number of available blocks.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 175 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
c) The NVMS Media Storage Server motion detection sensitivity shall be adjusted by configuring the amount of motion required to trigger an alarm and the amount of time that the motion is present.
d) The NVMS Media Storage Server motion detection sensitivity shall be adjusted by configuring the amount of motion after trigger is required to stop the alarm and the amount of time that the motion is present.
e) The NVMS Media Storage Server motion detection shall provide a learning mode allowing the system to automatically learn the motion in the selected detection zone
18 The NVMS shall support a built-in Watchdog module
a) The Watchdog shall monitor operation of all services and automatically restart them if they are malfunctioning.
b) The Watchdog shall be responsible for restarting the application or in a last resort restart the server in case of malfunction of software components
19 The NVMS shall provide a full interconnectivity between analog matrix operations and IP video to analog and digital outputs.
20 The NVMS shall have the capacity for unlimited analog video inputs and outputs.
21 The NVMS shall have the capability to program each IP viewing station to view and control selected cameras only.
22 The NVMS shall provide a Windows based GUI (Graphical User Interface)
23 The NVMS shall provide operation on multiple VGA monitors connected to a single PC using standard hardware and software.
24 The NVMS shall be based on a true open architecture that allow for use of non-proprietary PC and storage hardware that shall not limit the storage capacity and shall allow for gradual upgrades of recording capacity
25 The NVMS shall digitally sign recorded video using 248-bit RSA public/private key encryption.
26 The NVMS shall allow for changing the encryption key.
27 The NVMS Shall support management and control over unlimited satellite sites.
28 The NVMS shall provide alarm dry contact interfaces to allow for any alarm input initiating any action in the NVMS system.
a) The NVMS shall transmit dry contact information over the IP Digital Transmission Network.
29 The NVMS shall provide a serial interface for alarm input to allow for any alarm input initiating any action in the NVMS system.
a) The NVMS shall transmit alarm serial information over the IP Digital Transmission Network.
30 The NVMS Shall support full duplex audio communication and transmission signals over the IP Digital Transmission Network.
31 The NVMS shall provide alarm management module.
a) The alarm management shall be able to set any monitor or groups of monitors to automatically display cameras in response to alarm inputs.
b) The alarm management shall be able to reset automatically or manually alarmed video.
c) The alarm management shall allow for multiple modes of alarm handling capability, these modes to be programmed within the same system.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 176 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
10. DIGITAL VIDEO SURVIELLANCE CLIENT CONTROL SOFTWARE
32 The NVMS client shall consist of Administrator Tool application, a Monitoring application, an Archive Player application, a Web Monitoring access, a Web Archive Player access and a Mobile Monitor application.
33 The NVMS client shall perform the following applications simultaneously without interfering with any of the Storage Server operations (Recording, Alarms, etc.):
a) Live display of cameras
b) Live display of camera sequences
c) Control of PTZ cameras
d) Playback of archived video
e) Retrieval of archived video
f) Instant Replay of live video
g) Use of graphical controls (maps)
h) Use of procedures (Macros)
i) Configuration of system settings
j) Execution of system macros
k) Events Back-ups
34 The NVMS client applications shall support any form of IP network connectivity, including: LAN, WAN, VPN, Internet, and Wireless (WiFi and Cellular) technologies.
35 The NVMS client applications shall support IP Multicast (UDP) and Unicast (TCP or UDP) video streaming.
36 The NVMS client applications shall automatically adapt to the network topology and use the best available method to receive streaming video.
37 The NVMS client applications shall provide an authentication mechanism, which verifies the validity of the user.
38 NMRS Client MONITOR Application
a) The Client Monitor application shall allow for live monitoring of video and audio.
i The Monitor shall enable view of 1 to 4 video tiles simultaneously on a single SVGA (1024x768) monitor at 30fps per camera.
ii The Monitor shall enable view of up to 8 video tiles simultaneously on a computer supporting dual SVGA (1024x768) monitor outputs at 30fps per camera.
iii The IP Based NVMS Shall provide on each of the VGA monitors independently the following tile views:
1) Full screen
2) Quad
3) 3x3 (9-view)
4) 4x4 (16-view)
5) 1 + 9 (One large and 9 small view)
6) 1+11 (One large and 11 small view)
7) 1+12 (One large center tile and 12 small view)
8) 1+15 (One large and 15 small view)
b) The NVMS Monitor application shall allow operators to view an instant replay of any camera.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 177 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
i The operator shall be able to define the amount of time he wishes to go back from a predefine list or through a custom setup period.
ii The operator shall be able to control the playback with play, pause, forward, and speed buttons.
c) The NVMS Monitor application shall allow operators to add bookmarks or to switch their instant replay view into the Archive Player application, for advanced operations, by clicking on a single button in the Instant Replay tab.
d) The operator shall be able to choose and trigger an action from a list of available actions included but are not limited to:
i View camera in a video tile
ii View camera on a Decoder (analog monitor)
iii View Map or procedure in a video tile
iv Starting/stopping PTZ pattern
v Go to PTZ Preset
vi Sending alert messages
vii Sending e-mails
viii Send/receive messages through a serial data stream
ix Executing a macro
e) The NVMS Monitor application shall provide management and control over the system using a standard PC mouse, keyboard.
f) The NVMS Monitor application shall display all cameras attached to the system regardless of their physical location on the network.
g) The NVMS Monitor application shall display all camera sequences created in the system.
h) The NVMS Monitor application shall allow for unlimited cameras sequences, which can be run independently of each other on either digital VGA monitor tiles or analog CCTV monitors.
i) The NVMS Monitor application shall allow operators to control (Pause/Play, skip forwards, skip backwards) Camera Sequences, without ability to view and control the same sequence.
j) The NVMS Monitor application shall display all cameras, sequences and analog monitors in a logical tree.
k) The NVMS Monitor application operator shall be able to drag and drop a camera from a tree of available cameras into any video tile or an analog monitor icon for live viewing.
l) The NVMS Monitor application operator shall be able to drag and drop a camera sequence from a tree of cameras into any video tile or an analog monitor icon for live viewing.
m) The NVMS Monitor application shall support Graphical Site Representation (Maps) functionality, where digital maps are used to represent the physical location of cameras and other devices throughout facility.
i The NVMS Maps shall have the ability to contain hyperlinks to create a hierarchy of interlinked maps.
ii The NVMS Maps shall be able to import maps from any graphical software supporting BMP, JPEG and/or GIF image formats.
n) The NVMS Monitor application operator shall be able to drag and drop a camera from a map into a video tile for live viewing.
i The operator shall be able to click on an icon in a map to initiate PTZ camera preset, run PTZ pattern, view camera in an analog monitor or send an I/O stream.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 178 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
o) The NVMS Monitor application shall support the procedure functionality, where procedures can be triggered to appear during a certain event and can be used to provide detail written or verbal instructions to the operator as to the actions to be taken.
p) The NVMS Monitor application shall support touch screen technology
i The operator shall be able to optimize the monitor for touch screen technology
q)video streams
r) The NVMS Monitor application shall support digital zoom on video streams
39 Each workstation running the IP Based NVMS client application shall be able to use a CCTV keyboard that can control the entire set of cameras throughout the system, even if the system consists of motorized cameras produced by different manufacturers.
a) The NVMS client shall be able to use multiple CCTV keyboards to operate the entire
brands, including their PTZ functionalities (i.e.: one keyboard manufacturer controls -versa).
b) The NVMS client shall allow for a CCTV keyboard to be attachable directly to a encoder/decoder via its serial port.
c) The NVMS client shall allow for a CCTV keyboard to be attachable directly to the PC runing the NVMS client application via its serial port.
d) The NVMS client CCTV Keyboard Interface shall provide full PTZ control.
i The operator shall be able to control pan-tilt-zoom, iris, focus, dome relays and dome patterns
ii The NVMS client software shall allow the operator to access the PTZ configuration menus with no need of additional hardware.
iii The NVMS client software shall allow for operator PTZ priority ranging from 1 to 255
1) This shall prioritize which operator has control over a camera vs. another operator trying to control the same camera at the same time.
e) The NVMS client CCTV Keyboard Interface shall provide full video matrix operations
40 The NVMS shall support full control for PTZ (Pan Tilt and Zoom) cameras.
UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY:
A. Features On Line Built in protection against over voltage, overload, spikes transients and battery discharge. Alarm for battery operation. Rating of 5 KVA 15 Minutes SMF battery backup at full load operations.
INPUT Input 230 V AC single phase. Frequency: 50 Hz + 5 %
OUTPUT
KVA : 15 KVA Voltage : 230 V AC Voltage Regulation : 0.5 % Freq. Regulation : 50 Hz + 5 % Overload : 150 % for 10 seconds
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 179 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
11. ACCESSORIES
A. Weather proof housing for outdoor application
The Housing should be made of extruded aluminum and should be weather proof. The minimum internal dimensions of the housing should be capable of housing the camera and the Verifocal lens.
The camera housing should be: Compatible to camera Suitable for the make and model no of cameras offered and as specified by the manufacturer Should be compact and indoor / outdoor type as required.
Should be weather proof in case of outdoor mounting. Should be Vandal proof
B. Camera mount
The camera mount should be: Of the same make as that of camera and suitable for the model number offered as specified by the manufacturer. Should be compact and indoor / outdoor type as required. Should support the weight of camera. Camera accessories such as housing pan & tilt head in any vertical or horizontal position. Should be weatherproof in case of outdoor mounting.
C. Speed dome controller/PTZ controller
Speed Dome Controller should have variable speed joystick, LCD for programming and it should be able to control the Encoders as well as speed dome for PAN / TILT / Zoom functions.
D. Video Wall Rack
The video wall mountings should be of powder coated MS frames/supports and should be strong enough to take care weight of all Monitors. It should be suitably fabricated in such a way that only screens of monitors should be visible outside. Power supply wiring with suitable capacity sockets /earthing should be neatly installed on the rack. Video wall computers should also be enclosed in the rack. The supporting frames of monitors should not sag due to its weight.
E. Cables
No. Connectivity Cable Type Connector
1 Camera to Video Encoder Coaxial RG11 BNC 2 Video Encoder to L2 Switch UTP CAT 6 RJ45 3 L2 Switch to L3 Switch in control room Single Mode Fiber SC 4 L3 Switch to Video Wall Switches UTP CAT 6 RJ45 5 From L3 switches to NVR/NAS Box UTP CAT 6 RJ45
D. Installation of UTP cable
a)recommendations and/or best industry practices.
b) Pair untwist at the termination should not exceed one-half an inch. c) Bend radius of the cable in the termination area should not be less than 4 times the outside
diameter of the cable. d) The cable jacket should be maintained as close as possible to the termination point. e) Cables should be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or
block should be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 180 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
f) The distance between UTP data cable and any power cable should be more than 4 inches. g) Each cable should be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that
can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle, where the label is obscured from view should not be acceptable.
h) Cables should be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices). i) Horizontal distribution cables should be bundled into groups of not greater than 40 cables. Cable
bundle quantities in excess of 40 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the bundle.
j) Cables should not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires. k) Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation
should be replaced by the contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost. l) A self-adhesive label or PVC marker ferules should identify the Cables. A cable label should be
applied to the cable behind the faceplate on a section of cable that can be accessed by removing the cover plate. Similar label or marker ferrules should also be placed on a section of the cable near to the patch panel termination.
m) Pulling tension on 4-pair UTP cables should not exceed 25-pounds for a single cable or cable bundle. The pathway should be adequately sized so as not to exceed the 80% cross-section fill of cables. The pathway should be securely installed in the facility.
n) Care should be taken when pulling cables into trucking to avoid damage due to snagging. Trucking partitions should be used to separate the data cables from power, and bridges should be used where data cables have to cross the mains.
Instruction of OFC cable
Proper cable preparation is essential for splicing and installation. The following points outline some special precautions which are specific to fiber optic cable installation and therefore need to be noted.
Fiber Stress: The fibers in the cable should not be subject to any undues stress. This means that if the cable is to be pulled into a long duet route hen the specialized equipment and procedures should be used. As well, if the cable runs vertically for a significant length (more than 10m) then loop should be provided every 10m.
Bend Radius: The cable manushould be no bends tighter than specified either during installation or once cable has been seen fixed.
Cable Ties: If cable ties are used, then it is very important that they are not over tightened, thereby causing localized bending and fiber stress.
Spare Cable: At least 5m of cable should be left at each end to allow testing, positioning of enclosures, spare fiber for repairs etc. Where appropriate, spare loop of cable should be included along the cable run to assist repair in case of accidental damage.
Labeling; All cables and cable end should be labeled clearly.
Cable End Protection: Where cable ends are to be left exposed then hey should be sealed with heat shrink caps to prevent ingress of dirt or moisture.
Earthing: In many circumstances completely non-metallic fiber optic cables can be used to eliminate all earthing problems. If metallic elements are present then they should be earthed in accordance with the installation.
Light guide Interconnect Unit (LIU)
It should be installed for terminating the OFC cables. It shall provide minimum bending radius and the splice trays shall function as a splice cover for pigtail splicing. It shall be of complete aluminum fully powder coated. Cable glands shall be provided for secure anchoring the incoming cables. Rubber grommets shall be provided at the cable entry point for tight sealing. The splice tray shall also be of aluminum powder coated with splice holder. Cable spools shall of flame retardant.
OFC CONNECTORS
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 181 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
It shall be single mode SC type with push-pull mechanism. Fully in compliance with latest industry standard. It shall be possible for selection of wide range of ferrule hole diameter selection.
OFC ADAPTORS
It shall be suitable for single mode SC type fiber cable connectors. Fully in compliance with latest industry standard. It shall be with snap / latch mechanism.
OFC PATCH CORDS
It shall be suitable for single mode SC type fiber cable connectors with plastic moulded plug type connectors. Standard 2.5 mm ceramic ferrules shall be used. It shall be compact and easy to connect. POWER WIRING SYSTEM
Rigid PVC (heavy duty) Conduit Wiring System as per IS: 9537.
Materials
Conduits
(i) All rigid conduit pipes shall be of PVC and be ISI marked. The wall thickness shall be not less than 1.6 mm for conduit upto 32 mm dia and less than 2 mm for conduits above 32 mm dia.
(ii) The maximum number of PVC insulated sables conforming o ISI: 694-1990that can be drawn in one conduit as per standard norms. Conduit sizes shall be selected accordingly in each room.
(iii) No conduit less than 20 mm in diameter shall be used.
conduit terminations in wall. All flexible conduits used in he system should be Halogen free, flame retardant and self extinguishing polyamide conduits.
Conduit Accessories The conduit wiring system shall be complete in all respects, including their accessories.
All conduit accessories shall be of solvent cement plastering type and under no circumstances pin grip type of clamp grip type accessories shall be used. Bends, couplers, etc. shall be solid type in recessed type of works and may be solid or inspection type as required.
Saddles for surface conduit work on wall shall not be less than 0.55 mm (24 gauge) for conduit up to 25 mm dia. and not less than 0.9 mm (20 gauge) for larger diameter.
The minimum width and the thickness of clips used for fixing conduit to steel joints, and clamps shall be per standard norms.
Outlets
The switch box or regulator box shall be made of metal on all sides, except on the front. In case of cast boxes. The wall thickness shall be at least 2 mm and in case of welded mild steel sheet boxes, the wall thickness shall not less than 1.2 mm (18 gauge) for boxes upto a size of 20 cm x 30 cm, and above this size 1.6 mm (16 gauge) thick MS boxes shall be used. He metallic boxes shall be duly painted with anticorrosive paint before erection.
An earth terminal with stud and 2 metal washers shall be provided in each MS box for termination of protective conductors and for connection to socket outlet/metallic body of fan regular etc.
Clear depth of the box shall not be less than 60 mm, and this shall be increased suitably to accommodate mounting of fan regulators in flush pattern.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 182 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The fan regulators can also be mounted on the switch box covers, if so stipulated in the tender specifications, or if so directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Except where other wise stated, 3 mm thick phenolic laminated sheets as per clause shall be fixed on he front with brass or cadmium plated iron screws as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
Wires
Wires shall comply the following features:
PVC insulated with a rating of 105 deg. C bright annealed electrotype grade (99.9% pure) copper standard conductors multi drawn simultaneously (Unilay, twisted conductors) for uniformity of resistance, dimension and flexibility.
Color coded as below:
Phase R - Red Phase Y - Yellow Phase B - Blue Neutral - Black Earth - Green
Installation
Common aspects for recessed and surface conduit works
Conduit joints
The conduit work of each circuit or section shall be completed before the cables are drawn in. Conduit pipes shall be joined by means of couplers and accessories only. Cut ends of conduit pipes shall have no sharp edges, nor any burrs left to avoid damage to the insulation of conductors while pulling through such pipes.
Bends in conduit
All necessary bends in the system, including diversion, shall be done either by neatly bending the pipes without cracking with a bending radius of not less than 7.5 cm, or alternatively by inserting suitable solid or inspection type normal bends, elbows or similar fittings, or by fixing cast iron inspection boxes, whichever is most suitable.
No length of conduit shall have more than four bends from outlet to outlet.
Additional requirements for recessed conduit work.
i) Making
a. The chase in the wall shall be neatly made, and of ample dimensions to permit the conduit to be fixed in the manner desired.
b. In the case of buildings under construction, the conduit shall be buried in the wall before plastering, and shall be finished neatly after erection of conduit.
c. In case of exposed brick/rubble masonry work, special care shall be taken to fix the conduit and accessories in position along with the building work.
ii) Fixing conduits in chase
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 183 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
a. The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of staples hooks or by means of saddles, not more than 60 cm part, or any other approved means of fixing.
b. All joints of conduits pipes shall be treated with some approved preservative compound to secure protection.
iii) Fixing conduits in RCC work
a. The conduit pipe shall be laid in position and fixed to the steel reinforcement bard by steel binding wires before the concreting is done. The conduit pipes shall be fixed firmly to he steel reinforcement bars to avoid their dislocation during pouring of cement concrete and subsequent tamping of the same.
b. Fixing of standard bends or elbow shall be avoided as far as practicable, and all curves shall be maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself with a long radius which will permit easy drawing in of conductors.
c. Location of inspection / junction boxes in RCC work should be identified by suitable means to avoid unnecessary chipping of the RCC slab subsequently to locate these boxes.
iv) Fixing inspection boxes
a. Suitable inspection boxes o he minimum requirement shall be provided to permit inspection, and to facilitates replacement of wires, if necessary.
b. These shall be mounted flush with the wall or ceiling concrete. Minimum 65 mm depth junction boxes shall be used in roof slabs and the depth of the boxes in other places shall be as per IS:2667 1977.
v) Fixing switch boxes and accessories
Switch boxes shall be mounted flush with the wall. All outlets such as switches socket outlets, etc. shall be flush mounting type, unless otherwise specified in he Additional Specifications.
vi) Bunching of cables
a. Cables shall be always be bunched so that the outgoing and return cables are drawn into the same conduit.
b. In case of three phase loads, separate conduits shall be run for each phase from the distribution boards to the load points, or outlets as the case may be.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 184 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
SPECIFICATION FOR IP BASED CAMERA
III. PTZ Camera Specifications : 36 x OPTICAL ZOOM
A GENERAL
1 The network (IP) PTZ Dome camera shall consist of a dome drive with a variable speed for pan and tilt with continuous 360 rotation, 1/4-inch high resolution color camera, motorized zoom lens with optical and digital zoom and auto focus and high resolution digital video of 4CIF (704x480 NTSC / 704x576 PAL) using the MPEG-4 compression algorithm and TCP/IP transmission.
B Camera specifications
1 The camera shall be a network (IP) based camera.
2 The camera shall be available in NTSC and PAL formats.
3 The camera shall operate from 24VAC
4 The camera as a minimum shall maintain 30fps NTSC/ 25fps PAL video at 4CIF digital video resolution (704x480 NTSC/ 704x576 PAL)
5 The camera shall digitize and compress the video using the latest in video compression technology and shall utilize MPEG-4 video compression
6 The digital video shall provide dual encoded video streams to allow simultaneous and independent viewing and recording of live video at different frame rates and/or quality.
a) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at a frame rate between 1-30 NTSC /1-25 PAL
b) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at three (3) video resolutions:
i CIF (352x240 NTSC/ 352x288 PAL)
ii 2CIF (704x240 NTSC/ 704x288 PAL)
iii 4CIF (704x480 NTSC/ 704x576 PAL)
c) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at variable bandwidth from 64kbs to 4Mbs
7 The camera shall provide six (6) auxiliary dry contact in and one (3) relay out
a) Auxiliaries shall be accessible over the Ethernet IP network
8 The camera shall have an Ethernet (IP) interface using an RJ-45 CAT5, CAT5e or CAT6 UTP cable
a) The camera shall as minimum provide the following communication protocols:
i TCP/IP, UDP/IP, RTP/IP, HTTP, IGMP, ARP
9 The camera IP protocol shall communicate over the Ethernet network using Multicasting technology and shall utilize IGMP-Snooping version 2.0 or better
10 The camera shall provide a Bidirectional audio in and out
a) Audio input -46 3dBV into one ohm
b) Audio output -45 3dBV into 16 Ohms minimum
11
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 185 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
12technical specifications
a) The camera shall deliver a 360 continuous pan travel
i The camera motor shall be of a brushless micro stepping motor
b) The camera pan travel speed as minimum shall support a variable speed between 0.1per second continuous pan to 280° per second
c) The camera tilt travel as minimum shall be between 0 to -90
d) The camera shall provide 118 preset positions
i Camera shall provide Preset Accuracy of +/- 0.1
e) The camera shall provide a freeze image option for preset call up
f) The camera shall provide three (3) user defined patterns including pan, tilt, zoom, functions; pattern programming shall be available through the digital IP management system
g) -programmed time frame
h) The camera shall provide eight privacy windows blanking in variable color options from white to black colors.
i All video covered by privacy window shall be obscured at any user defined pan, tilt and zoom angles
i) Camera shall support the auto flip feature to rotates the dome 180° at bottom of tilt travel
13 The camera shall provide high resolution 36x color, Day/Night camera optical zoom with a minimum of 12x digital zoom and shall have the following specifications:
a) The 36x high resolution color, Day/Night camera shall:
i The camera shall be a high-resolution 470 TV lines color and 550 TV lines in monochrome mode
ii The camera shall be a 1/4-inch color CCD type with 470/550 lines of resolution 2:1 interlacing
iii The camera shall provide a pixel array of 758 (H) x 504 (V)
iv The camera shall have light sensitivity of 0.1 lux at 35 IRE color/day and 0.01 monochrome/night
v The camera shall provide a very-focal zoom length of 3.5mm - 91.0mm
vi The camera shall provide angle of view of 55° wide and 2.2° tele
vii The camera shall provide 26x using optical zoom and 12x by using digital zoom
viii The camera shall have white balance controls, manual or automatic
ix The camera shall have Digital Slow Shutter (DSS)
x The camera shall have automatic backlight compensation (BLC)
xi The camera shall have automatic gain control (AGC).
xii Camera shall provide Day/Night option on/off
14 The camera shall maintain operation at temperature of 32° - 122° F (0°-50° C) in normal operation
15 The camera shall provide for outdoor operation a fan and heater and shall maintain operation at temperature of -40° - 142° F (-40°- 60° C) in normal operation
16 The camera shall support SSL security protocol.
17 The housing shall be mountable in:
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 186 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
a) Outdoor bracket mount
i The camera housing shall be constructed of aluminum
ii The camera dome shall be of acrylic materials
iii The camera shall provide the option to install vandal resistant bubble constructed of polycarbonate.
iv Bracket mounts thread shall be of 1½ inch NTP
v Outdoor bracket mount shall provide fan and heather for wide climate operations
b) The housing shall meet or exceed NEMA-4X and IP66 requirements for weather resistance.
c) Regulatory
i FCC /UL
d) Warranty
i Minimum two (2) years
IV. Fixed Camera Specifications :
A GENERAL
1 The network (IP) camera shall be with 1/3-inch high resolution color camera, high resolution digital video of 4CIF (704x480 NTSC / 704x576 PAL) using the MPEG-4 compression algorithm and TCP/IP transmission.
B Camera specifications
1 The camera shall be a network (IP) based camera.
2 The camera shall be available in NTSC and PAL formats.
3 The camera as a minimum shall maintain 30fps NTSC/ 25fps PAL video at 4CIF digital video resolution (704x480 NTSC/ 704x576 PAL)
4 The camera shall digitize and compress the video using the latest in video compression technology and shall utilize MPEG-4 video compression
5 The camera should support IEEE 802.3af protocol for power over Ethernet.
6 The digital video shall provide dual encoded video streams to allow simultaneous and independent viewing and recording of live video at different frame rates and/or quality.
a) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at a frame rate between 1-30 NTSC /1-25 PAL
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 187 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
b) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at three (3) video resolutions:
i CIF (352x240 NTSC/ 352x288 PAL)
ii 2CIF (704x240 NTSC/ 704x288 PAL)
iii 4CIF (704x480 NTSC/ 704x576 PAL)
c) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at variable bandwidth from 64kbs to 4Mbs
7 The camera shall provide two (2) auxiliary dry contact in and one (1) relay out
a) Auxiliaries shall be accessible over the Ethernet IP network
8 The camera shall have an Ethernet (IP) interface using an RJ-45 CAT5, CAT5e or CAT6 UTP cable
a) The camera shall as minimum provide the following communication protocols:
i TCP/IP, UDP/IP, RTP/IP, HTTP, IGMP, ARP
9 The camera IP protocol shall communicate over the Ethernet network using Multicasting technology and shall utilize IGMP-Snooping version 2.0 or better
10 The camera should be able to take lenses using the standard C / CS mounts.
11 The camera should support Day / Night Operation. The minimum illumination at 40 IRE, F1.2 should be 0.5 for day and 0.05 for night.
12 The camera scanning system should be at least 625 TVL.
13 The camera should be fitted with Veri- 50 mm lens.
14
15 The camera shall maintain operation at temperature of 32° - 122° F (0°-50° C) in normal operation
16 The camera shall support SSL security protocol.
17 The camera should be fitted in a housing capable of withstanding conditions prevailing on an Indian port.
18 Regulatory
i FCC / UL
19 Warranty
i Minimum two (2) years
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 188 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
V. Fixed Dome Camera Specifications :
A GENERAL
1 The network (IP) fixed Dome camera shall be with 1/3-inch high resolution color camera, high resolution digital video of 4CIF (704x480 NTSC / 704x576 PAL) using the MPEG-4 compression algorithm and TCP/IP transmission.
B Camera specifications
1 The camera shall be a network (IP) based camera.
2 The camera shall be housed in a vandal resistant housing
3 The camera shall be in PAL format.
4 The camera shall operate from 12VDC or Power over Ethernet (POE) optional injector splitter.
5 The camera shall maintain 30fps NTSC/ 25fps PAL video at 4CIF digital video resolution (704x480 NTSC/ 704x576 PAL)
6 The camera shall digitize and compress the video using the latest in video compression technology and shall utilize MPEG-4 video compression
7 The digital video shall provide dual encoded video streams to allow simultaneous and independent viewing and recording of live video at different frame rates and/or quality.
a) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at a frame rate between 1-30 NTSC /1-25 PAL
b) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at three (3) video resolutions:
i CIF (352x240 NTSC/ 352x288 PAL)
ii 2CIF (704x240 NTSC/ 704x288 PAL)
iii 4CIF (704x480 NTSC/ 704x576 PAL)
c) The camera shall provide the option to set each stream at variable bandwidth from 64kbs to 4mbs
8 The camera shall provide two (2) auxiliary dry contact in and one (1) relay out
a) All auxiliaries shall be accessible over the Ethernet IP network
9 The camera shall have an Ethernet (IP) interface using an RJ-45 CAT5, CAT5e or CAT6 UTP cable
a) The camera shall as minimum provide the following communication protocols:
i TCP/IP, UDP/IP, RTP/IP, HTTP, IGMP, ARP, SSL
10 The camera IP protocol shall communicate over the Ethernet network using Multicasting technology and shall utilize IGMP-Snooping version 2.0 or better
11 The camera shall provide a Bidirectional audio in and out
a) Audio input -46 3dBV into one ohm
b) Audio output -45 3dBV into 16 Ohms minimum
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 189 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
12 The camera shall be equipped with variable focal 2.6mm 6.0mm
i F-stop 1.3 ~ 360
ii Field of view shall be 108.2° x 80.4° (Wide), 47.6° x 35.6° (Tele)
iii Minimum illumination of 0.65 Lux at 40 IRE, F1.3
iv Automatic Iris Control
v Aspherical lens
13 High-resolution CCD camera shall at minimum support the following:
a) The camera shall be a high-resolution 540 TV lines
b) The camera shall be a 1/3-inch color CCD type with 540 lines of resolution
c) The camera shall provide a pixel array of 768 (H) x 494 (V) NTSC / 752 (H) x 582 (V) PAL
d) The camera shall have light sensitivity of 0.65 lux at 40 IRE, F1.2
e) The camera shall have white balance controls
f) The camera shall have backlight compensation (BLC)
g) The camera shall have automatic gain control (AGC).
h) The camera shall have a day/night mode
14 The camera shall maintain operation at temperature of 32° - 122° F (0°-50° C)
15 The camera shall be housed in a vandal resistant housing
a)polycarbonate and composite materials with a polycarbonate viewing bubble.
b) The housing shall include tamper resistant fasteners to prevent entry without a special tool. Tamper resistant fasteners shall be pin-in Torx Type.
c) The housing shall be mountable in three (3) configurations:
i Surface mount
ii Recessed (ceiling) mount
iii Corner mount
d) The housing shall meet or exceed NEMA-4X and IP67 requirements for weather resistance for all models which includes surface, recessed/ceiling and corner options.
16 Warranty
i Minimum two (2) years
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 190 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
EARTHING REQUIREMENT
Protective (loop earthing) conductor (s) shall be laid along the runs the conduit between the metallic switch boxes and the distribution boards/switch boards, terminated thereto. These conductors shall be of such size and material as specified. Depending upon their size and material, the protective earth conductors shall be either drawn inside the conduits. When laid external to the conduits, this shall be properly clamped with the conduit at regular intervals.
The protective conductors shall be terminated properly using earth studs, earth terminal block etc. as the case may be.
Jointing of wires is not permissible, however looping may be done from point (same circuit) or using a terminal strip in junction box where site condition warrants, prior permission from Engineer-in-Charge shall be obtained.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 191 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Security Management System (SMS) specified shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package by the Access/Security Control Contractor. The SMS / ACS shall be able to provide for and integrate (as required) the following subsystems:
Integrated Access Control Alarm Monitoring Integrated Digital Video Management Interactive Alarm/Facility Graphics Display Wireless Alarm and Video Transmission Associated Access Control and Alarm Equipment Control Multiple Language Operation Multiple Tenant Operation Access Initiated and Event Initiated Control Elevator Control Workstation and associated equipment, as required.
The SMS shall be based upon a distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on a true peer-to-peer, token passing Local Area Network (LAN). The SMS shall be capable of monitoring, recording, and displaying card access activity and supervised alarm inputs/outputs on a continuous, real time basis. Each installation shall comply with local, state, and federal code requirements as applicable. The system shall be user friendly, providing a user interface that allows for training of non- technical personnel to effectively operate and administer the system.
The ACS shall be designed to provide a centralized location with the ability to monitor, control, view, and communicate from a secure location within a facility or within the facilities or systems network.
System expansion capability: Minimum 100% over specified requirements with no additional software or required software upgrades.
1.01A SYSTEM CAPACITIES
Total minimum number of Hosts: 1 Total number of concurrent hosts: 48 Total number of optional Backup Workstations: = total number of connected workstations Support for up to 633,000 readers using either magnetic-strip, Wiegand, proximity, Biometrics, Pinpad technologies or user definable custom card formats. Support for up to 6,120,000 unique ID records. Support alarm monitoring of up to 1,638,400 supervised digital input points. Support for 1,638,400 output control points Support for 5,000,000 on-line transaction history records Archive history limited only to hard disk space ( Bidders to specify the hard disc capacity requiremet )Support for up to 1100 system passwords Support for up to 10,000 unique graphics pages Support for Ethernet Lan: TP (10 Base-T) Twisted pair, AUI (10 Bases) Thicknet, BNC (10 Base-2-default) Thinnet.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 192 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
1.01B SYSTEM CAPABILITIES
The following functional capabilities are considered essential for the Security Management System (SMS) described in this specification:
A. Integrated Access Control B. Intrusion Detection C. Door Control D. First Key Auto Unlock E. Anti-Passback control F. Alarm Assessment (Instructions) G. Database Security And Encryption H. Dynamic Maps Displaying Alarm Points I. If/Then/and/or/not functions J. Time Scheduled Events K. Access Control initiated events L. Windows Based, Mouse oriented operations M. Dial Up Alarm processing from remote locations N. Dial Up processing of Access Control functions for remote locations O. Ability to Import and Export cardholder data P. Comprehensive User Definable Reports Q. Comprehensive User Definable Archiving R. Integrated Digital Video Management S. Integrated Video Badging T. Visitor Management Module U. Two Man Rule V. Escort Privileges W. Support for OPC, DDE and ODBC technologies X. Ability to be WEB enabled
1.02 RELATED WORK
1.02A DOOR HARDWARE
Not specifically covered under this specification. It will be the responsibility of the individual bidder/contractor to provide and install all electric locking equipment including but not limited to electro-magnetic door locks, egress equipment, door status/alarm switches, and related power supplies. All electronic door hardware provided shall meet the local authority having jurisdiction for its intended use. Any code deficiencies associated with the system once installed will be left to the installing contractor to be replaced with the appropriate equipment.
1.02B WIRING / CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
All wiring for Distributed Control Unit communications and all wiring for related sub-LAN controller communications shall be Belden 9184 or equivalent. Belden 9841 or equivalent may be used for LAN lengths not exceeding 5000 ft. (1220m).
All other cable is to meet the following requirements as outlined below:
All cabling shall be shielded unless specified otherwise by a card access manufacturer. As a minimum, standard 18 AWG cable shall be installed unless in direct conflict with manufacturers specifications All cabling used in the implementation of systems integration shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Provide specialist personnel for the complete wiring installation. Provide cables, conduits, cable tray and ancillary equipment necessary to complete the installation.
1.02C GROUNDING
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 193 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Take particular attention to the grounding of equipment cases and shielded cables to eliminate noise interference and avoid electrical loops. Provide shielded cable for all communications cabling. Correctly terminate shields at ground bars and connect to the main building ground or as specified by the manufacturer.
Insulate all incoming or outgoing shielded cables from control cabinet casings. Provide suitable terminals, where grounding of cable shields is required. Make provision of a through connection of cable shields for through connected communications cables.
1.02D SYSTEM SUPPORT Provide a guarantee, in writing, of system support for a minimum period of six years after final completion, including provision for technical support, hardware, and spare parts. Demonstrate that
committed to total and complete backward compatibility. System support shall include all aspects of the originally installed system as well as system training.
1.03 SUBMITTALS Provide a submittal for approval prior to commencement of installation and training to include:
English language description of system operation Single line diagrams Building floor plans indicating all related equipment and their termination point Input/output point schedules A copy of the database put into logical groups that represent how information will be displayed to the user Sample graphics pages Floor plans showing location of all controllers and sensors Co-ordination drawings showing interface terminal numbers and cross-referenced wire numbers for all connections between the SMS and other equipment Details of all related equipment Full details of each control station including equipment and wiring diagrams and terminal layouts Fully detailed wiring diagrams for the entire security control, monitoring and electrical cabling installation
1.03A MATERIALS Furnish and install at locations shown, the specified the following equipment to provide a completely
operational Security Management System.
A. Door hardware and accessories B. Card Readers C. Monitors D. PC Workstations E. Network Interface Boards F. Distributed Control Units G. Security Control Units H. Printers I. Alarm relays J. Miscellaneous cable, wire, associated connectors, and hardware K. Power supplies
All materials and equipment shall be standard, regularly manufactured equipment. All systems and components shall be thoroughly tested and proven in actual field use. All system main control components shall be from one manufacturer.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 194 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS
history, the contractor shall submit a final spares list for all functions for this system. This list shall be based upon a philosophy of maintaining a central system operation with a simple remove/replace capability. The final spares list shall be developed as a result of a joint customer/contractor review of the recommended list during the installation phase. Submit this final recommended spares list for approval prior to system completion, so that spares are available upon activation.
1.05. Definitions
LAN: Local area network. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. SMS: Security Management System. SCU: Security Control Unit DIO: Discrete Input/Output Unit READER: Selected card reader technology.
2.00 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
System administration shall be available from any workstation in the system. The system specifically must have the capability to support not less than 48 concurrent workstations connected on the network at the same time manipulating and modifying the same database. The Security Management System shall support distributed processing such that all connected workstations function in a true multi-user, multi-tasking environment. The system shall not be dependent on a Server therefore fully Client / Server based systems are unacceptable.
The system architecture shall be capable of supporting single sites and/or campuses as well as multiple sites located in different geographical locations. Any additional software options needed to support a multi-site or multi-campus system shall be included in the base bid. Connection to remote facilities shall be handled through a TCP/IP connection.
The Operating System shall be based upon a Microsoft Windows 2000, XP Professional, or Windows Server 2003 platform. Unacceptable operating systems include Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows ME, Windows NT4, Windows NT5, OS/2 and UNIX operating systems.
The system shall co-exist with the Microsoft Office Suite of applications.
The system shall support web based viewing and control.
The system shall employ a non-proprietary, open, highly scalable database based on Microsoft SQL.
The system shall have the capability, as originally bid, to transmit alarm and video information to remote and wireless operator terminals. From these terminals, operators of the system shall be able to:
Individually call up cameras from multiple locations at the same time. Individually call up pre-recorded video footage. Take control of the facilities electric locking equipment in order to perform an emergency lock down.
It is the intend of the customer to utilize as much of the existing hardware and communications infrastructure as possible to minimize the installation costs. Any associated integration with the existing system or systems should be considered.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 195 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.01 SOFTWARE
A. GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the automatic system functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. It is the intent of this specification to require provisions of a system that can be fully utilized by individuals with no, or limited, previous exposure to PC's and programming techniques and languages The software shall include a general-purpose operating system, as well as access control system application software. All available vendor workstation application software shall be provided with the system, and shall reside in each and every PC. Unbundled software packages where the vendor can charge the user extra fees, require dedicated workstations, require annual software renewal licenses or require systems rebooting for access are unacceptable.
The software in the system shall consist of both "firmware" resident in the controllers / card reader cum controllers and "software" resident in the operator workstations. The architecture of the system, and the application software/firmware shall be distributed with no single-system component responsible for a control function for the entire sub controller LAN. Each controller resident on the system shall contain the necessary firmware and I/O capability to function independently in case of a network failure. No active control sequences shall be resident in the PC workstations. All PC workstations shall be removable from the system without loss of control function -- only alarm monitoring, long-term history collection, database additions/deletions, and operator monitor/command/edit functions would be lost.
The primary operator interface to the system shall be through a graphinteractive presentation using a mouse and cursor for object selection and commands. The SMS contractor shall work with the customer to complete fully integrated graphics pages allowing operators of the system to manipulate controlled points using only a mouse. The system shall not be limited to only one type of operator interface at a time.
page shall be displayed upon system start-up, operator activity time-outs, and when the system is not in use. This default system page may be any one of the standard dynamic graphic pages or a custom display developed for this purpose. The operator shall be able to display their corporate logo, emergency information, etc. as the default system page.
The system software shall support "pop-up" windows for point commands. On selecting an object with the cursor, a window shall open up to present the operator with choices corresponding to the operator's password authorizations. These point commands shall include state changes, manual override of application software, test mode activation and test value entry. This window shall include, for reference, the point's descriptor (name), the point's hardware address, and alarm status.
The system software shall support "pop-up" windows for point editing. On selecting an object with the cursor, a window shall open up to present the operator with a list of active point database editors, if permitted by the opto modify the basic parameters associated with a point, as well as access any programs assigned to the point (such as time schedules, calculations, events, etc.).
The system software shall be based upon interactive prompts and choices using "dialog boxes," as opposed to memorization of commands, "syntax", exact spellings, etc. This interactive prompt and choices approach shall be used in monitoring, issuing commands, and editing. Command choices shall be as simple as "clicking" the cursor over the correct word choice prompts (i.e., SECURE, RELEASE, UNLOCK), without typing in the letters.
or to locate any system point to monitor status, issue commands, or edit associated database without knowledge of the point's name, address, or associated controller, and without having to refer to a "tree" directory. The operator shall be able to zoom in on a building in a campus graphic, zoom in on a floor in a building graphic, zoom in on a door in a floor plan graphic, etc.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 196 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The system software shall be compiled for faster execution speeds and shall offer all of the following features and capabilities:
Input / Output Capabilities: From any local PC workstation or any remotely connected PC workstation, the system operator shall have the capabilities through the keyboard/mouse to request dynamic displays of current values or status using a tabular or graphic format. A global database sort utility shall allow an expanded tabular display of only the points on the current graphic display. This expanded tabular display shall list point name, hardware address, dynamic state or value, alarm status, override status, and test mode status. Obtain a summary of all access control doors with status (under access control, access control disabled, or access control ignored) and allow issuing commands to the access control doors to manually force the door to one of the above states, or provide a momentary release (act as a valid key/card access), or return to automatic control (remove manual state). Add, delete, or change points within each Controller or application routine while on-line. Change point I/O descriptors, status, and alarm descriptors and engineering unit descriptors while the system is on-line. Add new Controllers and sub-controllers to the system while the system is on-line. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays providing dynamic, animated displays. All development, editing and display work shall be capable of being performed with the system fully on-line and in full communications with the Controllers and sub-controllers. To enhance system response the database shall be distributed with up to 96,000 ID records residing in each door-processing unit. Each DCU (distributed control unit) shall support a
gital input/output units). Each DPU and DCU shall be capable of providing full access control decision capabilities and monitoring of assigned input/output alarm points whether on or off-line with host computer.
2.02 DATABASE CREATION AND SUPPORT
A. GENERAL The intent of this specification is to provide an SMS system that will allow the owner to independently perform his or her own modifications to the system from any operator workstation. All changes shall be done utilizing standard procedures, and must be capable of being done while the system is fully on-line and operational. The DCU on the Controller LAN shall automatically check a PC workstation's database files upon connection to verify a current database match. A utility shall inform the operator if the DCU's database files do not match the backup files stored on the PC workstation, along with the date of the last DCU modification and date of the last backup. The owner must have, as a minimum, the on-line capability to:
Add, Delete and Modify and points and parameters. Determine which PC workstation(s) will receive alarms, messages & transactions on a point by point / door-by-door basis. Change, add, or delete English language descriptors (i.e., name). System I/O points may be identified either by name or by it's logical address. Up to 16 characters shall be available for the English language descriptor, which shall be used in all control sequences. Use of a second abbreviated point "name" for control sequences is unacceptable complexity. Add, modify, or delete alarm limits. Add, modify, or delete individual records. Add, modify, or delete points in start/stop programs, trend logs, etc. Create and/or modify override parameters. Add, modify, and delete any applications program. Create custom relationship between points. A general-purpose user utility shall be provided, such that the user can implement software interlocks, calculations, etc. Assign application programs to points (as opposed to assigning points to programs). Obtain an "audit trail" of which application programs are controlling an individual point, on a point-by-point basis.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 197 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.03 DOOR PARAMETERS Provide a door parameters editor, which shall include the following options:
Reader technology selected. User definable Wiegand reader formats between 26 and 64 bit. If the reader is for the cab of an elevator (lift).
rates through portals such as turnstiles.
Whether anti-passback (APB) is implemented or not. What the entry zone number is (APB). What the exit zone number is (APB). Escort required criteria. Anti-passback criteria Customizable reader buzzer control per event type. Whether the door sense switch is used, and if so whether it is a normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contact. Whether the Request to Exit (RTE) is used, and if so whether it is a normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contact. Whether a shunt function is used. Whether the door-locking device (e.g., an electric strike) is used, and if so, whether it is activated for entry requests, exit requests, or both. How long the locking device will be unlocked after an authorized read or RTE pushbutton operation. The unlock interval shall be adjustable from 1 to 255 seconds.
rst Key Auto-implement access control after hours and automatically unlock the doors on a time schedule during the day. This feature does not unlock the door until an authorized key is read after the scheduled unlock time. If this feature is not used, the door is unlocked per the Door Mode Schedule, regardless of key activity.
alarming during the timer interval. The timer shall be adjustable (operator selectable) from 1 to 7200 seconds. Individual door configuration for 2-man rule. The polarity control of the reader audible device to be configured for individual sounds based upon the door event (forded door, valid card read, denied card read, door open to long).
2.04 SYSTEM PASSWORDS To limit control by the system operators, the SMS shall support system passwords at both the host level and controller level.
The host passwords shall limit user access and privileges to provide system level security. A
passwords. It shall be possible to enable or disable each and every individual function of the SMS on a password-by-password basis using a simple point and click operation. Each password shall allow a 30-character operator name, a 10-character alphanumeric password, and 4 characters for the operator initials. System passwords time out after a user-defined period of time.
-issued network ID and password to automatically log them into the SMS system. Logon passwords shall allow for any number of limited views Automatic expiration of passwords as set by system administrator. Non re-use of system passwords Screen settings and system configurations are remembered based on password log in. User configurable ID card log on in lieu of keyboard log on.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 198 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Separate from the SMS logon an additional layer of passwords shall limit operators from gaining access to certain control panel functions. The controller passwords shall restrict user access and privileges to system controllers. The controller passwords shall support 4 levels:
Level 1 Display only access Level 2 Display controller data, issue commands, acknowledge alarms. Level 3 Display data, issue commands, acknowledge alarms and edit all functions except the DCU password function. Level 4 - Display data, issue commands, acknowledge alarms and edit all functions, including the DCU password function.
2.05 SYSTEM RESPONSE TIMES
Any state change or alarm condition shall be communicated to the SMS system immediately and without delays. The times listed below shall serve as the SMS systems maximum times for doing automatic refreshes and point polling.
Change of State: Time for a change of state or value of a field point to register an alarm or update at the workstation: 3 seconds. Manual Command: Time for a manual command from the workstation to override a field device: 1 seconds. Graphics Display: Time to display a full graphic with current parameter values: 8 seconds. System Logs: Time to display a system log or report: 1 seconds. Global Data Transfer: Time for data to travel between standalone controllers: 3 seconds. Local Control Event: Time for standalone controller to initiate an output action after a change of input: 2 seconds.
2.06 ALARM /MESSAGES/EVENT SIGNALING AND ARCHIVING
A. ALARMS The SMS shall provide for user definable alarm summary screens. As a minimum the SMS shall support critical alarms, priority alarms and routine alarms. The user definable alarms summary screens shall support four states as follows:
Point in alarm (Un-Acknowledged) Point in alarm (Acknowledged) Point returned to normal (Un-Acknowledged) Point returned to normal (Acknowledged)
The system shall support functions such that either of the two acknowledgement functions can be disabled so that they are not required. For a low priority informational alarm - acknowledgements would be configured as not required and
alarm state and automatically clear from the alarm window when it returns to normal. The operator is still given the ability to acknowledge the alarm and append text etc but this is not enforced. For a medium priority alarm - whether the alarm returns too normal or not, the alarm will remain in the alarm window until it is acknowledged. If the acknowledgement is prior to the return to normal then the alarm stays in the alarm window until the return to normal is received at which point it automatically clears down. If the acknowledgement is after the return to normal then the alarm clears down once the acknowledgement process is completed. For the highest category of alarms the return to normal message also requires to be acknowledged. This alarm cannot clear down until both acknowledgements have been given.
The system shall support user selectable colors by alarm category. The status colors shall indicate the following:
Alarm The point is currently in alarm, and the alarm has not yet been acknowledged. Alarm Acknowledged The point is currently in alarm, and has already been acknowledged. Return to normal The point went into alarm, but has since returned to normal without being acknowledged.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 199 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
The configurable summary screens will display the date/time that each alarm occurred, the number of times the point has go into alarm, the point address, the name assigned to the point, the current status of the point, and the system graphic page the point can be found on. The Access Control System shall provide a means for storing all alarms, messages, and events for an indefinite period and allow for quick retrieval at any time. The Alarms database shall be an open format. The Access Control System shall maintain as, a minimum, the latest 10,000 alarms for quick review or display. In the event of an alarm condition occurring, the Access Control System shall display a message on the operator workstation, print on the printer, sound an audible alarm, optionally display the graphic page the alarm point has been assigned, and optionally set off a visual annunciation (i.e. flashing lights).
The Access Control System shall have the following alarm processing features, all of which shall be user definable:
Incorporate an icon on the banner which shows the number of unacknowledged alarms Print of the alarm screen currently being viewed Define multiple filters on any alarm window Sort the alarms contained in any window Alter the display preferences for any window Remember preferences and filters by user login
-mail Escalate alarms to other destinations based on user definable parameters Provide for user selectable Image Verification based on card access control alarms. Each off normal condition shall cause an alarm and an appropriate message, including the time of the alarm, system and point descriptor, and alarm condition. The operator shall have the capability to select, at any time, which state/value shall be considered alarms and which alarms shall cause automatic dial-out to occur. Each critical alarm or change-of-state message shall be displayed. All Controller LAN network alarm messages shall be stored on disk and may be reviewed on the CRT and/or printed on operator selected printers at any time. It shall be possible to sort this alarm/change-of-state database by date, time and/or item fields. Provide an automatic page selection option for alarms. This feature (operator activated and selectable) automatically selects and displays the deven when the operator is signed off. In the event of multiple alarms, the page associated with the most recent highest priority alarm is displayed. Automatic user defined time delay of alarms during equipment start-up or shutdown shall be provided to prevent nuisance and false alarms. Unique alarm delays on analog and discrete input points to prevent "flutter" alarms. The operator shall have the capability to route specific alarms to specific workstations, and/or to specific pagers. Each operator workstation (user configurable) will have the ability to notify an operator of an alarm condition anywhere in the system. Alarm notification shall consist of:
Automatic print of the alarm condition. Display of an icon indicating an alarm condition, including while in a third party program. Operator selectable audible alarm indication. The audible alarm will be user configurable. Relay operation at the PC workstation, used to activate notification devices where the operator will be too far from the PC to see visual indication, or the environment is too noisy to hear the PC's audible alarm. Automatic alarm/message redirection of unattended workstations connected on a WAN.
B. EVENTS The SMS software shall have the ability to automatically initiate commands, user-defined messages, take specific control actions, or change control strategy and application programs as a result of an event condition.
An event condition may be an operator defined limit, a change-of-state, a specified state, or alarm occurrence, a return to normal or logical combinations of the above. Events shall not be limited to alarm occurrences only but shall also include time, dates, as specified system results. All event assignments or modifications shall be owner defined through the input keyboard.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 200 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
C. MESSAGES The system shall be capable of automatically displaying or printing a user-defined message subsequent to the occurrence of selected events. Events shall not be limited to alarm occurrences. It shall be possible for the owner to construct independent messages for each DCU, each with as many as 64 characters. The operator shall be able to:
Compose, change, or delete any message Display or log any message at any time Assign any message to any event
The Messages database shall be an open format or provide a means to export the messages information for use in other third party programs.
D. ARCHIVING The system shall be capable of automatically archiving. Based on user configurable options the system shall be capable of:
Automatic or manual archiving. The overall size must be fully configurable up to 5 million records. 3 millions records shall be stored online with no archiving. Start archiving based on Time, Size, Operator or any combination. Decide where the archive will go. Archived items will be accessible directly from the access control systems alarm-handling screen.
2.07 TRANSACTIONS Transactions Summary: Provide password-protected access to historical files containing Access Control related to the Access Control database. The filters shall operate over user defined time ranges for time and date, using a two entry (earliest, latest) selection for both time and date to support multiple days, each with a time slice, versus a continuous duration between two days. The operator shall be able to
-vide an operator definable custom filter template with the following entries:
Filter Name Point Address - Doors shall be points in the system. Provide two Door Points which define the low and high end of a range of Doors Tenant - Provide two Tenant numbers which define the low and high end of a range of Tenants (1-255) Key/Card - Provide two ID numbers which define the low and high end of a range of ID numbers Zone - Provide anti-passback zones which define the low and high end of a range of anti-passback zones (0-64) Records Display type: Permanent/Temporary/Both as defined in the Individuals Editor. Device Name: 16-character Door or Elevator cab name. May be used as an alternative to the Point address range above, for operator convenience. Group Name Last Name First Name Field Names: Provide a separate entry for each of the 1 to 16 user-defined fields. These fields may have from 1 to 16 ASCII text characters, as well as the wild card? And * symbols for matching and sorting on subsets of a field. Transaction Selection: Operator shall be able to select from any or all of the following: Reader entry, Reader entry-elevator, Reader exit, Denied - schedule, Denied - APB, Denied - tenant, and denied -Issue, Denied - selection. Provide a print utility for the transactions summary, which includes the following statistics: Reader entries for selected readers (excludes elevators) Elevator entries for selected readers Elevator floor selection Reader exits for selected readers Reader denials (based upon Tenant, issue, selection, schedule, or APB)
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 201 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.08 ACCESS CONTROL PERSONNEL DATABASE
A. GENERAL Provide a personnel database that shall reside in the PC workstation in a SQL format, and have access control functions downloaded to the Controller and DPU for remote, standalone operation. Where the system consists of multiple PCs on a Commercial LAN, changes to the Personnel Database in one PC workstation shall be equalized among all SMS workstations, automatically. All changes shall be done utilizing standard procedures and must be capable of being done while the system is on-line and operational. The SMS system shall employ a user- -protect the owner from accidental or incidental deletions of the cardholder or personnel database.
The owner must have as a minimum, the on-line capability to: Add, delete, modify and copy new ID devices (keys, cards, templates) and link these to the Personnel Database. Assign information to the Personnel Database including the ID #, Last Name, First name, Group Name, and other user defined fields. The user shall be able to define the Field Name for the user-defined fields and field database entries of 16 alphanumeric characters. In a multi-tenant system, individual authorized tenants shall be able to assign different field names to their respective Personnel Databases. Video badging images Assign status to a card, which may be permanent (not a visitor), temporary (a visitor), or disabled (entered into the database, but not enabled). For cards designated as temporary, allow the operator to pre-determine the activation schedule based upon the following entries:
Begin date (MM/DD/YY) Begin time (HH:MM) End date (MM/DD/YY) End time (HH:MM)
Provide a means for the user to define the content and order of data presented in the Personnel Database editor specifically, provide the ability to set the sort order on any field and filter and sort the data within any field. The following options shall be available to the operator:
Permanent records - include/exclude Temporary records - include/exclude Disabled records - include/exclude Display Order - allows the operator to select from key/card #, Last name, First name, Group, or any of the user defined 16 fields as the basis for the primary ordering of the presentation display.
presented in order of the alphanumeric sort of the Social Security #. Key/card range - values entered. ASCII text parameters - For each of the custom fields, allows the entry of up to 16 characters for matching and sorting, including the wild card characters of? and *. * shall be the default and support all entries (a wide open filter) Anti-passback options whether hard, soft, or graced.
Provide a means to assign doors to designated tenants, groups, and individuals. Assign individuals to doors associated with the tenant that the individual is a part of and the group that individual is apart of.
Provide a means to assign Mode Schedules to doors, that determine when the door is under access control, when the door is unlocked, and when the door is locked (even against authorized access control devices). Also, an Anti-Passback reset trigger may be assigned to the door mode schedule to cancel and purge anti-
Provide a means to assign Personnel Schedules to doors, that determine when (date and time) authorized personnel are permitted access to designated doors. Each personnel schedule shall support seven access intervals, each with a start and stop time (time slice). Provide a seven-day week plus
y to assign up to 31 personnel schedules per door.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 202 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Provide a means to assign personnel to "Groups" which consist of a combination of doors and associated personnel schedules. The system shall also be capable of issuing multiple groups to an individual cardholder. The user shall be able to assign individuals to groups to save keystrokes and manages organizational changes. Different tenants shall be able to assign different groups to their respective access control databases.
2.09 REPORTS
A comprehensive report writer capability based on Crystal Reports from Seagate shall be provided in each workstation. The report writer shall have design capability built in as well as provide report templates and report wizards. The report writer shall have the capability to sort and extract data from the on line open database as well as from archived files and be able to generate finished custom reports. Reports shall be capable of manual initiation and/or printout as well as automatic printout. The system will have the capability to print reports on a daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, or automatically generate reports based upon a set scheduled. The system will have the capability to print reports as a result of an
e the capability for statistical data manipulation and extraction. As a minimum, the custom report writer must provide the capability to generate four types of reports: statistical detail reports, summary reports, trend graphic plots for up to four variables, and x-y graphic plots.
Prepared Historical Report: Provide an on-line, historical, database sort report utility, with the following features:
Prompts to select database sort by time, by date, by point (or range of points) with system supplied default values of 24 hours, today, all Controller LAN points, respectively. Prompts for activating conditional sorts, including: changes-of-state, alarms, returns to normal, operator sign on/off, operator acknowledgments, command errors, program control of a point, test on/off, manual on/off, program control (AIC, Event) override, power restore, LAN reconfiguration, controller off-line, time/date modifications, and archive disk memory 90% full, 95% full, and full. Provide audit trail messages of operator edits of access control, specifically editing the databases for individuals, groups, tenants, transactions, doors, personnel schedules, access-initiated control, and elevator control. Also, include door prop alarms, forced door alarms, and failure of the database to download to field controllers. Single keystroke retrieval resulting in a report listing the most recent condition first, along with the time, date, address, name, condition type, and value.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 203 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Transactions - Doors Report Transactions - Individuals Report Zone Census Report
Free Form Historical Reports: An operator shall be able to manually request reports from a console keyboard. All reports shall have time and date and shall not be limited to "canned" or "standard" format. Data shall be gathered from the field LAN's automatically, and archived on owner-selected workstations. The systems shall include a report writer function that supports as a minimum, the following functions:
Long term data archiving to hard disk Automatic directives to download to transportable media such as floppy diskettes or tapes for storage Data selection methods to include database searches, sorts, and manipulation Data extraction shall support mathematical manipulation Data reports shall allow development of XY curve plotting, tabular reports (both statistical and summary), and multi-point timed based plots with not less than four (4) variables displayed. Generating reports either normally at operator direction, or automatically under PC directions. Both Events driven and scheduled automatic reports shall be supported.
Archiving to disk shall automatically occur as long as the PC workstation is ON and physically capable of communicating with the Controller LAN(s), regardless of what programs are currently being executed at the time data is needed to be stored to disk (i.e., an operator can be developing a financial spread sheet in Microsoft Excel when the SMS stores field trending information to disk -- the current Excel program shall not be interrupted or halted) for archiving.
Proprietary reporting packages will not be acceptable.
Provide facility to extract data from archived files and generate custom reports. Automatically generate reports through user or fixed time schedules, or on demand. Provide facility to generate reports in a user-defined format. Provide facility to export (as a whole or individually) the following data to be used in some other common database software package:
Tenants FloorsDoors Transactions Messages Passwords Individuals Groups Field Names Alarms (sorted by priority)
Support two printer operations. The alarm printer will print all alarm annunciations and return to normal, operator acknowledgments, action messages, system alarms, operator sign-on and sign-off. All operator control activities shall include the operator's initials in the printed and disk record. The data printer will be reserved for printing reports, graphical page prints, and database prints. Both printer functions shall be available from any PC workstation.
2.10 HELP SCREENS Context Sensitive Help Screens: Provide context sensitive help screen associated with the current keyboard/mouse input.
Application Sensitive Help Screens: Provide the capability to develop help screens tailored to job specific applications. These screens shall be displayed by selecting an icon from an associated graphic display. These help screens will be intuitive in nature and provide the operator the ability to perform the task at hand without any help from outside individuals. The help screens will automatically prompt the operator to enter relevant information in to specific areas of the system.In addition to the help screens, the SMS system will provide the operators of the system with administrative Wizards designed to aid in the training of operational personnel. These Wizards will also set operators through the process of modifying the cardholder database. As operators are editing
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 204 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
the cardholder database through the Wizards, the information shall also automatically be added to the system with no additional editors being opened.
2.11 OPERATOR WORKSTATIONS General
If required, provide an on-site operator workstation to provide user friendly, operator interface with the complete system. If required, provide an off-site operator workstation to provide user friendly, operator interface with the complete system. Provide all operator interface software and commissioning. A. Hardware specifications
Provide workstation equipment, conforming to the specified requirements. (Refer to the project requirements schedule).
Pentium IIII 1.2GHZ or the latest configuration 512 MB Ram - File Master 256 MB Ram - workstation (equalization station) 40 gig. Hard Drive DVD - RW Drive for data archiving
TFT screen Windows based operating System Sound card/speakers for audible alarms
2.11.1 SOFTWARE GENERALLY
The Access Control System shall allow all connected workstations to function in a true multi-user,
multi-tasking environment such that:
All terminals can access the same network and database at the same time. All terminals can access and/or control the same control unit at the same time All terminals can access and/or modify the same control unit database at the same time All terminals shall be able to archive data, alarms, access transactions, and network actions to hard disk regardless of what application programs are being currently executed (i.e., LAN operating system, spreadsheets, word processing, etc.). All archiving disk traffic shall be accomplished on-line without affecting the operation of the current programs. An operating system to control all support functions including memory allocation, disk access and external devices. An application package specific to the manufacturer's SMS, operating in a Microsoft Windows 2000, Server 2003, or XP Professional environment. Any other required proprietary programs for functions such as graphics, reports etc. Latest revisions of all programs at time of practical completion. Licensing of software at time of practical completion. The software shall include all available software licenses for a fully integrated Security/Access Control and Lighting Control system.
Operator Workstation: Any operator workstation shall: Accept data from the Controller LAN on an as needed basis without having to scan the entire network of DCU's for updated point data. Interrogate the Controller LAN for updated point data when requested by the system operator. Allow operator command of equipment connected to DCU's . Allow operator to place specific DCU's in or out of service. Allow parameter editing of DCU's, and "gateway" nodes (limited only by an individual operator's password assignments). Store duplicate database on file for every DCU and allow this database to be downloaded to the remote panel while the system is on-line. Control or modify specific programs on a DCU basis. Develop, store and modify dynamic color graphics utilizing system supplied mouse and mouse- supported software. It shall be possible for both mouse-supported workstations and non-mouse
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 205 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
supported workstations to coexist on the same Controller LAN. Provide data archiving of assigned points throughout the system and to support overlaid graphing of this data utilizing up to four variables. To maintain system integrity, the operator shall have available an automatic DCU save utility.
backup purposes. This utility will function for both direct connect and dial-up workstations. The operator will have the option of selecting daily, weekly or monthly as a scheduled frequency
performed for dial- up as well as direct connected locations. This program shall accommodate automatic daylight savings time adjustments. The SMS shall support not less than 48 operator workstations, each with simultaneous access to the Local Area Network. Regardless of how the operator workstations are connected to the Controller LAN (i.e., hardwired or via modem), the network shall support all specified functions. The operator may print a selected DCU database whenever desired. The operator shall be able to select any or all control parameters as needed. A "bind able" printout of the database of each DCU , with a floppy disk backup shall be submitted with "as-builts" as part of the final acceptance procedure. The CRT shall have a feature to indicate audibly and visually, Off-Normal conditions and messages pending, whether in SMS operating mode or third party software mode.
2.11.2 GRAPHICS
be displayed upon system start-up, operator activity time-outs, and when the system is not in use. This default system page may be any one of the standard dynamic graphic pages, or may be a custom display developed for this purpose. Tiered graphics pages will be usable through the system allowing the operator the ability to penetrate further into the system to gain more detail on any given graphical point. The operator shall be able to display their corporate logo, emergency information, an index of all graphic pages, etc. as the default system page.
The graphics system employed by the SMS system will allow for the addit
will perform a customer defined sequence of events such as:
Automatically run and print reports. Secure all pre-defined doors. Unlock all pre-defined doors.
Launch 3rd party applications
Launch 3rd party applications such as:
1. Windows Media Player. 2. AutoCAD. 3. Microsoft Word/Excel. 4. Any Windows compatible application
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC PROGRAMMING
Shall be part of the ACS system and not considered as an add on feature.
The operator shall have the ability to create, construct, and modify existing "dynamic" graphics pages for monitoring and system control without the need of outside assistance. This graphics utility shall be usable both for on-line control such as override and alarm acknowledgment, and for display of system status and alarm activity. The graphics program shall have the following features:
Microsoft Windows-based A separate or optional graphics generation program or package is unacceptable. Minimum of one second updating of real time data. Page summary feature for all graphic pages. Operator modification of set points and adjustable parameters. User-friendly operator development of graphics.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 206 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Comprehensive library of symbols. Ability to create user defined symbols. Provide an automatic page selection option for alarms. This feature (operator activated) automatically selects and displays operator is signed off. In the event of multiple alarms, the page associated with the most recent highest priority alarm is displayed. On-line graphic development shall be supported on all workstations connected to the LAN either as "hard-wired" direct connect or via remote dial-in. Provide for import of .BMP file format graphics developed in third party programs such as Paintbrush. Such imported graphics shall be used as a "backdrop", so that all other dynamic and animated system features may be superimposed on this graphic. Similarly, it shall be possible to import CAD type drawings, by first converting the CAD drawing from .DXF format to .BMP format. Add, delete, develop and/or modify custom dynamic color graphic displays utilizing either custom symbols or system-supported library of symbols. Graphics shall support at least 16 colors and not less than 60 outputs of real time, live dynamic data per graphic. The system shall allow this dynamic graphic data to be displayed as an animated symbol (i.e., when a door opens the door on a floor plan moves to the open position), an ASCII set (i.e., on-off), or as an analog bar graph. Each operator workstation shall support not less than 10,000 separate graphic pages. The contractor shall include 15 developed graphics as approved by the owner's representative for this project. The following graphic pages shall be provided As a minimum:
Index page of all graphics, with direct selection. Floor plan of each floor with door status with point control.
System graphics: Provide the following graphic displays: Master graphic from which other graphics may be selected. Building elevations and plans: A number of graphics indicating position of security operations centers, plant rooms and major items of equipment and providing access to other graphics. A series of graphics (e.g. building sections) showing all equipment operational during fire mode. A series of floor plans showing all secured portals and sensor locations. System configuration: Indicating relationship of workstation, controllers, printers etc. Building single line electrical diagram: Graphic showing status and values of all monitored electrical equipment. Include graphics for the required spare points. Tenancy fit out: Allow for graphics associated with tenancy fit out.
During and/or after completing construction of the dynamic graphic flow chart, the cursor may be placed on the icon, and by "clicking" the mouse; the icon may be expanded into the associated database editor for adding, deleting, or modifying the point, module, or application program. Similarly, the point may have its "pop-up" window called up to issue point commands, or overrides. Systems requiring graphic programming languages which are off-line, or require time delays for compiling, or which are not integrated into the primary operator workstation are not acceptable.
Select a graphic screen refresh rate between one-second refresh and 60 second refresh rate. Graphic Display: On-line graphic development shall be supported on all workstations connected to the LAN either as "hard-wired" direct connect or via remote dial-in. The system shall support any mix of mouse-supported workstations or non-mouse workstations. The systems graphic software shall provide the following minimum features:
"Page Linking" such that it is possible to "zoom" into a specific door or any other page through a sequence of graphics without using anything but the system mouse. Generate, store, and retrieve library symbols for use in generating graphic pages. Single or double height characters. 60+ dynamic points of data per graphic page.
Pixel level resolution. Graphics will be displayed on VGA monitors with a 640 X 480 resolution, minimum. Animated objects for discrete points (i.e., doors open and close on authorized access or when a parking gate opens it goes up on the screen). CCTV icons providing direct links to the device for full control.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 207 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.12 SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
A. GENERAL All points in the system shall be monitored and/or controlled through "intelligent" Distributed Control Units / card reader cum controllers. Each control unit in the system shall contain its own microprocessor and memory with a minimum 300 hours battery backup. Each control unit shall be a completely independent stand-alone "master" with its own hardware clock calendar and all firmware and software to maintain complete control on an independent basis. Control Units generally shall:
Release all access doors in case of fire /fire related conditions. Acquire, process, and transfer information to the PC operator workstations or other control units on the network. Accept, process, and execute commands from the other control units or other input devices, or multiple PC workstations. Allow access to both database and control functions by multiple workstations at the same time. Record, evaluate, and report the changes of state and/or value that occur among points associated with the control unit. If any operator workstation or transmission network fails, but the power to the control unit does not, the control unit shall continue to perform all control functions associated with the points connected to that control unit. Control Unit Upload/Download Capability: Each control unit shall be able to download from or upload to any PC operator's workstation. All point data shall be modifiable from any authorized PC operator's workstation and downloaded to the control unit over the Control Unit LAN. This upload/download shall be readily performed on a regular basis without interrupting the control functions in the control unit. All upload/downloads shall be performed without the operator workstation being taken "off-line. Additionally, all Control Unit upgrading shall be performed via a download from any workstation on the system; i.e. it shall not be necessary to replace e-proms to perform a system revision upgrade. The system controllers must provide an integral time clock and have the capability to synchronize time with operator workstation. The system controllers must provide a dedicated port for communication link between panels as well as a redundant communications port for backup communications and have the ability to auto-detect breaks in the network. The system controllers must provide a separate RS232 communications port for connection of portable operator's terminal (laptop PC and/or a hand held controlling device). Provide sufficient input/output modules to achieve the required control functions, including the required spare points. Modules: Removable without having to disconnect field cabling. Control Unit Point Scanning: It shall be possible to independently set the scan or execution speed for each point in the control unit to an operator selected time from 1 to 254 seconds. Field door controllers will have the ability to store within their own memory the last card transaction.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 208 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.12.1 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE/FIRMWARE
Provide the following features:
Real time, day of the week and calendar. Automatic clock synchronization from operator workstation. Time schedules. Holiday schedules. Temporary schedule overrides Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switcher Software timers with one-second resolution. User-defined alphanumeric software and hardware point descriptors. Resident diagnostics, which continuously monitor the operation of the unit, enunciate faults (including continuous looping of control loops, unreliable data) and provide continuous operation using the last reliable data. Test mode to drive a selected point (not the physical service) to a selected value and observe the consequential effect. Password protection. Alarm processing program including the ability to redirect alarms according to alarm priority and time schedules. Flash downloadable. Individually addressed Spare points: Allow for all software associated with the required spare points.
Program loading: On-line, either from a personal computer directly into the Control panel or through the operator workstation network.
2.12.2 CONTROLLER APPLICATION ROUTINES
Automatic Time Scheduling (ATS): Each Control Unit shall provide self-contained ATS programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of devices. Each ATS program shall support up to seven normal day schedules, seven "special day" schedules and two temporary day schedules. The special days schedule shall support up to 30 unique date/duration combinations. Each load shall support an individual time program, as a minimum.
Each load shall be able to be assigned at least 17 control actions per day with one-minute resolution. Operator selectable time schedule operation choices shall include the following: Start, Optimized Start, Stop, Optimized Stop, Cycle, and Optimized Cycle.
A minimum of 30 holiday periods up to 99 days in length may be specified for the year.
It shall be possible to create "temporary" schedules up to a week in advance that will be in operation only on the day or days specified.
Support a temporary "special day" date and duration to be broadcast to selected or all sites to account for unusual situations Such as temporary operating hours or "snow days".
Support control actions to be performed at any operator selectable time of day as well as at "sunrise" and "sunset". Sunrise and sunset parameters shall be selectable based upon time zone, latitude, and longitude.
In additional to individual load scheduling, provide for group scheduling by designating equipment to hanges of large groups of equipment
which follow a common schedule. The master schedule shall provide a choice of fixed start and stop times by day, or a plus and minus adjustments to the existing schedule, in minutes. Master schedules shall provide a choice of immediate activation or activation at a later date and time.
Event Initiated Programming (EIP): Each Control Unit shall provide event-initiated programs. An event may be initiated by any data point. Triggering an EIP shall cause a series of control actions in a sequence, i.e., if point A reaches an alarm condition, start points 1 through 12. Up to 64 sequences can be defined per Control Unit. Each sequence may cause up to 16 control actions. Sequences may be chained together.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 209 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Access Initiated Control (AIC) An AIC is an automatically generated control action initiated in response to an access transaction for a selected tenant, group, or individual.
tenants assigned. If an AIC is directed to a single output the capability to initiate additional actions through Event Sequences and Event Action editors must exist. The capability must exist to cause control actions on a system wide basis from a single AIC (i.e. turn on Air Conditioning, lights etc.). The capability must exist to assign a minimum of 24,000 users to a single AIC. As a minimum, the following access transactions shall be capable of generating an AIC:
The quantities and types of door controllers shall be determined by the contractor based upon the requirement to provide a fully operational system, as per the intent of the specification, as shown on the drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. As a minimum, the following features shall be supported in each Door Processing Unit:
Resident card holders. ( Minimum 10,000 or depends on population) Support for maximum 4 doors per SCU Standalone Access Control Logic Real Time Clock/Calendar Resident Day & Date Based Logic Central Control and Monitoring First Entry Auto Unlock Zoned Anti-Passback (Local DPU level & Global across LAN) Elevators: one or two cabs, each with one reader. 2-Man Rule Multi-drop RS485 communications Fiber optic compatible On-board battery charger Optical tamper switches switch addressable (0-31) Supervised inputs Flash downloadable Supported readers technologies:
I/DISC Touch Memory Magnetic Key & Card ABA (Track 2) Wiegand (26 & 32 bit) Proximity Watermark Magnetics Biometrics
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 210 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.12.3 CONTROLLER OPERATION
Door Processing Interface (DPI) and then to the Door Processing Unit, so that it may operate in a standalone basis. This ensures rapid access processing and minimal dependence on a single point of failure. As a standalone controller, the DPU provides access to one or two doors. Support for a door monitor input, locking mechanism output, secondary alarm bypass output, and a request to exit input are provided for each door. Optionally, the second reader may be used for door exiting. When the door is controlled by two readers, anti-passback operation is available. As a distributed network controller the DPU allows centralized alarm monitoring, historical data collection, zoned anti-passback,
First Entry Auto Unlock allows the door to automatically unlock during the day based upon a time and day schedule (Modes) in the DPU. However, this feature ensures that the door is not unlocked
2.12.4 DATA COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK: RS-485 DATA RATE: 9600 BPS CABLE SUPPORTED: 22 AWG twisted pair, shielded (low capacitance, eg. Belden 9184 or 9855) CABLE LENGTH: 5000 ft (1500 m) maximum LED's are provided to indicate data transmission, receiving data, Normal power mode, standby power operation, RAM error,
2.12.5 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 32° to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) without battery backup; 50° to 100°F (10° to 38°C) with lead-acid battery backup OPERATING HUMIDITY: 10% to 80% RH, non condensing
2.12.6 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS - DIGITAL INPUT CONTROLLER The quantities and types of controllers shall be determined by the contractor based upon the requirement to provide a fully operational system, as per the intent of the specification, as shown on the drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. As a minimum, the following features shall be supported in each Digital Input Unit:
RS-485 Communications Multi-Drop Remote Operation Over Dial-Up Phone Lines
Central Control and Monitoring 16 Supervised Alarm Inputs Standard 4 States of Fault Supervision
Cut Short Open Closed
Alarm Input Shunting Support Via DPI or MCI Centralized Manual Overrides
2.12.7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK: RS-485 DATA RATE: 9600 BPS NETWORK WIRING REQUIREMENTS: CABLE SUPPORTED: 18 22 AWG twisted pair, shielded (low capacitance, eg: Belden 8760) CABLE LENGTH: 5000 ft (1200 m) maximum LED's are provided to indicate data transmission, receiving data, normal power mode.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 211 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.12.8 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTROLLER: 24V (±10%) DC or AC (50/60Hz), BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT: 2 Amps maximum (short circuit), 0.6 Amps typical POWER SUPPLY: 115Vac or 250Vac transformer (50/60 Hz ±15%), 40VA, maximum POWER FAILURE NOTIFICATION: Standard, using internal detection logic
2.12.9 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) without battery backup; 50° to100°F (10° to 38°C) with lead-acid battery backup OPERATING HUMIDITY: 0% to 80% RH, non condensing
2.13 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS - DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
The quantities and types of controllers shall be determined by the contractor based upon the requirement to provide a fully operational system, as per the intent of the specification, as shown on the drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. As a minimum, the following features shall be supported in each Digital Input/Output Unit:
RS-485 Communications Multi-Drop Remote Operation Over Dial-Up Phone Lines
Central Control and Monitoring 12 Supervised Alarm Inputs Standard 4 States of Fault Supervision
Cut Short Open Closed
8 Multi-Pulsed Tracking Latched
Alarm Input Shunting Support VIA DPI or MCI Centralized Manual Overrides
NETWORK: RS-485 DATA RATE: 9600 BPS NETWORK WIRING REQUIREMENTS: CABLE SUPPORTED: 18 22 AWG twisted pair, shielded (low capacitance, eg: Belden 8760) CABLE LENGTH: 5000 ft (1200 m) maximum LED's are provided to indicate data transmission, receiving data, normal power mode. TERMINAL BLOCKS: Removable screw terminal connectors
2.13.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) without battery backup; 50° to 100°F (10° to 38°C) with lead-acid battery backup OPERATING HUMIDITY: 0% to 80% RH, non condensing
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 212 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.14 PROXIMITY READERS The reader shall be proximity type with Smart Card chips. It shall read the ID number of the card or tag when presented to the surface of the reader without physical contact. Read range shall be nominally 4 inches from the rear surface when used with a card. Maximum dimensions shall be 4.6 inches (11.7 cm) high x 5.5 inches (14 cm) wide x 1.4 inches (3.5 cm) thick. The reader may be mounted directly on any material including metal without the use of standoffs, or concealed behind any building material except metal.
An LED on the front surface of the reader shall indicate to the user that the card or tag presented to the reader has been read. An audio beep tone to indicate that the card has been read shall be available as an option.
Electrical connections from the reader assembly to the system interface or CPU shall be via color-coded, five conductor, #18 AWG shielded cable (six conductor optional audio tone).
Wiring from the reader assembly to the system interface or CPU may be run inside metal conduit or EMT, as may be required by electrical codes.
Any of the readers shall be capable of being powered by a 1.2 amp-hour battery for at least five hours.
Accidental or intentional transmission of radio frequency signals into the reader shall not compromise the system.
-passback mode without changes to the reader.
The reader shall contain no internal code matching or memory devices to operate with a group of ID numbers.
The access control system readers shall have the capability to accept codes from any of the following proximity devices:
The presence of small metal objects such as keys or coins near the card or tag shall not alter the code read by the reader or prevent the code form being read by the reader. The individual card or tag shall be derived from a population of at least 134 million unique codes. Cards or tags shall be sequentially numbered. The user may specify codes or numbers. Exact replacements for cards or tags, which may be lost, damaged, or stolen shall be available upon request. Cards and tags having the same number shall also be available upon request. Cards, key ring tags, or badge tags may be used interchangeably and shall be compatible
any code matching or memory devices in the reader.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 213 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2.15 FIELD HARDWARE
A. Door Contact / Status Switch UL Listed
22AWG. Installation shall include the application of mounting compound for added adhesive strength. Where field conditions prohibit the use of a recessed magnetic contact, surface mounted switch shall be used. Type: Interior/Exterior,
B. Request To Exit Switch 1 3/4" diameter opaque colored mushroom cap push button Operation: Momentary N.O. and N.C. DPDB Circuits
C. PROXIMITY CARDS
Material: PVC Slot Punch: Vertical/Horizontal Permanent Marking: Includes P/N code, date code and ID number matching internal ID
E. Glass Breakage Detector UL Listed FCC Certified
Mounting locations at the wall or ceiling. Recessed or Flush Mount, Tamper available
F. Passive Infrared Sensor UL Listed FCC Certified Available in various designs to provide coverage of 30 ft. to 200 ft. depending upon the area of protection Combination heat and motion sensitive detection technologies, both needed to verify alarm condition (dual- technology). Ability to disable LED for Stealth mode Sequential Logic Input Automatic PIR temperature compensation Catch sensitivity: 1ft. per second Trouble output supervisory feature Phase sensitive PIR processing Ceiling, wall, corner, flush, and swivel mountable brackets to be available.
G. Locking Devices All locking devices providing access are to be of the electromagnetic type to meet the following requirements as outlined below:
Approved by the authority having jurisdiction, including local fire authorities to provide free egress at all times. Type: Electrified handsets, electric strikes UL listed Each door to be provide with an integral door status switch and magnetic bond sensor It will be up to the individual security contractor to provide the proper door locking equipment for each individual controlled door. All locking devices utilized on passages providing a main means of egress out of a protected space are to meet fire code and approved by the authority having jurisdiction, including local fire authorities Shall meet NFPA 101 Life Safety Code requirements UL listed Shall receive power from the lock power supply
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 214 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
J. Power supply Provide:
Power supply rated for the total load of the control station for all input and output modules energized, without diversity. Protection against power surges and over voltages. Battery backup to support panel memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Battery backup to support electric locks for a minimum of 4 hours. Individually fused outputs. 24-volt AC/DC control circuits throughout. The same type and manufactured power supplies shall be used for ACS .
BOOM BARRIER: The boom barrier shall be either 3m or 4.5 m or 6 m as per site, with opening time of not more than 2 seconds, with loop controllers, boom controller, weatherproof exteriors armed with
m shall be seamlessly connected to the nearest access controller and reports of IN/OUT movement to be recorded on the access management software.
3.01 INSTALLATION Install all devices in locations as shown on the drawings in accordance with standard industry practice.
Install and adequately support fixed wiring throughout the installation. For cabling routes not specified in detail, submit a proposed route layout.
Handling cables: Handle cables to avoid damage to insulation and sheathing. Report any damage and replace or repair-damaged cable as directed.
Straight-through joints: Unless unavoidable due to length or difficult installation conditions, run cables for their entire route length without intermediate straight-through joints. Where straight-through joints are used contain within a junction box arranged so that they are accessible after installation.
Tagging: Identify all cables at each end and at crowded intermediate points by means of stamped, non-ferrous tags, clipped around each cable.
Fire Caulking: Provide the appropriate penetration caulking.
Cables in false ceilings: Secure from building structure, not from other services.
Cables in conduits: Feed cables into conduits in such a way as to prevent twisting and crossing. Do not use inspection fittings for drawing in cables.
Cables on trays and ladders: Fix cables neatly to trays and ladders in single layers and parallel to the
non-corrosive fastening materials.
Segregation: Physically segregate data cabling from power and SMS input/out cabling and mains cabling from all other cabling.
PANELS Install panels and controllers within a dedicated metal enclosure. Documentation: Provide plastic fade-free points list in a pocket. Include terminal numbers, point addresses and short and long descriptions.
Small point controllers: Install adjacent to the controlled device, accessible for maintenance. Provide suitable enclosure.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 215 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
3.02 TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
The ACS shall utilize the above LAN architecture to allow all of the Control Units to share data as well as to globalize alarms. The Controller LAN shall be based upon a peer-to-peer, token passing technique with a data speed of not less than 19.2 KB.
Each individual ACS control panel shall have the ability to maintain 100% of the information needed for it to operate in the event it is disconnected from the rest of the system. Systems that require a "master" communications controller or network manager for the database storage and alarmed and activity buffering or operate in a degraded site-code mode are not acceptable.
3.03 COMMUNICATIONS
Utilize an established LAN or other communication standard to link all SMS equipment.
Technique: Token Passing network for Controller LAN, Polled for Small Point & Application Specific Controllers.
Configuration: A break in the communication path of the Controller LAN shall be announced as an alarm and shall automatically initiate a Controller LAN reconfiguration such that the resulting sections of the Controller LAN continue to function as separate LANs. No loss of control shall result from such a break in the Controller LAN.
Commercial LAN: Workstations on the Controller LAN may also reside on a higher tier "commercial" LAN. This "commercial" LAN shall be based upon Ethernet, and comply with IEEE 802.3 standards. Where a "commercial" LAN is implemented, it shall be possible to connect multiple Controller LANs together, with global data sharing across this commercial LAN.
Alarms and special event notices shall be routed to different workstations on the "commercial" LAN-based upon time of day, and day of the week.
Operator password assignment shall be available on both a system-wide basis and a workstation-by-workstation basis.
3.04 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. General
specification.
Provide a program for the testing and commissioning procedure. Use a qualified representative of the ACS supplier to co-ordinate testing and present at all tests and training courses and remain on-site until the ACS is fully operational.
B. Factory testing Procedure: Submit procedure for factory test at least two weeks prior to the test.
After test: Submit summary of results and necessary modifications.
C. Site testing and commissioning Carry out the following:
Attendance at the testing of all equipment that interfaces to the ACS and confirmation of the operation of such equipment from the ACS interface terminals. Testing of all field wiring from terminals to field interface terminal strips. Testing and commissioning of all power supplies and batteries. Verification of communication to remote systems. Testing of the operation of each control point from the operator's workstation (if supplied) and verification of the status of all points and alarm functions on graphic displays.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 216 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Demonstrate the following:
Operation of each control loop. Globally transferred information such as alarms. Detection and action of all alarm conditions. Communications with PC workstations. Time schedules and after-hours operation. Mapping of system points to operator's workstation(s). Operator's workstation software. Power fail re-starts. Essential power mode operation. Fire mode of operation.
B. Final acceptance Test: After the testing report and as built drawings have been approved by the customer's representative, the completed system shall be tested in the presence of the customer's representative. Acceptance of the system shall require a demonstration of the stability of the system. Should major equipment failure occur, the contractor shall replace or repair component (s).
3.05 NOTICE OF COMPLETION When the final acceptance test described above has been satisfactorily completed, the contractor shall issue a letter of completion to the customer indicating the date of such completion. The notice of completion shall be recorded by the contractor upon receipt of the customer completion letter. This date of record shall be the start of the one-year guarantee period.
Ratings : Manufactured in accordance with UL subject 13, type CM
Passed UL VW-1 Flame Test
UL CM approved
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 218 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
D. ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
1. SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 This specifications covers the requirements of design, supply of materials, installation, testing and
appliances and labour necessary to install the system, complete with high sensitive LASER-based Smoke Detectors with aspirators connected to network of sampling pipes.
1.2 The Bidder shall also make provision in the Aspirating Smoke Detectors to trip AHU and to shut fire dampers in the event of fire through the relay contacts.
2. CODES AND STANDARDS
The entire installation shall be installed to comply one or more of the following codes and standards :
NFPA Standards, US
British Standards, BS 5839 part :1
3 APPROVALS
All the equipments shall be tested, approved, and/or listed by :
LPCB (Loss Prevention Certification Board), UK
FM (Factory Mutual), US
UL (Underwriters Labaratoies Inc.), US
ULC (Underwriters Labaratoies Canada), Canada
Vds (Verband der Sachversicherer e.V), Germany
4. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.1 The System shall consist of a high sensitive LASER-based smoke detector, aspirator, and filter.
4.2 It shall have a display featuring LEDs and Reset/Isolate button. The system shall be configured by a programmer that is either integral to the system, portable or PC based.
4.3 The system shall allow programming of:
a) Multiple Smoke Threshold Alarm Levels.
b) Time Delays.
a) Faults including airflow, detector, power, filter block and network as well as an indication of the urgency of the fault.
b) Configurable relay outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault Conditions.
4.4 It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection system, supported by calculations from a computer-based design modeling tool. Air inlet diameter should be designed suitably depends on the length and diameter of the air sampling pipe.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 219 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
4.5 Optional equipment may include intelligent remote displays and/or a high level interface with the building fire alarm system, or a dedicated System Management graphics package.
4.6. Performance Requirements
a) Shall provide very early smoke detection and provide multiple output levels corresponding to Fault, Pre-Alarm, and Fire. These levels shall be programmable and shall be able to set sensitivities ranging from 0.005 20% obscuration / meter
b) Shall report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault output relays.
a) Shall monitor for filter contamination.
5. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENTS
5.1. Both Light Scattering and Particle Counting shall be utilized in the device as follows:
The Laser detection Chamber shall be of the mass Light Scattering type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types of varying size. A particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of
a) Preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke reading.
b) Monitoring contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to notify automatically when maintenance is required.
5.2. The Laser Detection Chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across critical detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.
5.3. The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the sensitivity from the set during commissioning. A learning tool shall be provided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm thresholds during the commissioning process.
6. DETECTOR ASSEMBLY
6.1. The Detector, Filter, Aspirator and Relay Outputs shall be housed in a mounting box and shall be arranged in such a way that air is drawn continuously from the fire risk area by the Aspirator and a sample passed through the Dual Stage Filter and then to the detector.
6.2. The detector shall be LASER-based and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range of 0.005 20% obs/m.
6.3. The detector shall have three independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds across its sensitivity range with adjustable time delays for each threshold between 0-60 seconds.
6.4. The Detector shall also incorporate facilities to transmit the following faults
c) Detector b) Airflow c) Filter d) System e) Zone f) Network g) Power
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 220 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
h) Urgent and Minor faults. Minor faults shall be considered as servicing or maintenance signals. Urgent fault shall indicate that the unit may not be able to detect.
6.5. The detector shall have single pipe inlet which must be reporting both Minor and Urgent flow faults.
6.6. The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess of 20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultra-fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of 0.3 microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around
6.7 The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed rotary vane air pump. It shall be capable of allowing/ supporting for a single pipe run with a transport time of less than 90 seconds.
6.8. The Assembly must contain relays for fire alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable (latching or non-latching). The relays must be rated at 2 A at 30V DC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option and either configured to replicate those on the detector or programmed differently.
6.9. The Assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. The date and time of each event shall be recorded. Each detector (Zone) shall be capable of storing up to 12000 events.
7. DISPLAYS ON THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY
7.1. The detector shall have a LED display for the multiple alarm threshold levels indicated and faults such as detector fault, airflow fault and indication for Isolate and Reset.
8. PROGRAMMERS
8.1. When required, a Programmer module may be located within the detector, a remote mounting box, or in a portable hand-held unit.
8.2 PC based configuration port shall be available to configure the detector.
8.3 Each Programmer at a minimum shall support the following features:
a) Programming of any device on the system. b) Viewing of the status of any device in the system. c) Adjustment of the alarm thresholds of a nominated detector. d) Setting of Day/night, weekend and holiday sensitivity threshold settings. e) reshold settings to suit
the current environment. f) Multi-level password control. g) To Program latching or non-latching relay operation. h) To Program energizing or de-energizing relays. i) To program high and low flow settings for airflow supervision. j) To Program aspirator speed control. k) To Program maintenance intervals. l) Facilities for referencing with time dilution compensation. m) Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid commissioning.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 221 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
9. NETWORK 9.1. The devices in the smoke detection system shall be capable of communicating with each other via
twisted pair RS485 cable. The network shall be able to support up to 250 devices (detectors, displays units and programmers).
9.2. The network shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerant loop for both short circuit and open circuit. Any communication faults shall be reported unambiguously and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire link in the fault messages.
9.3. PC based configuration tools shall be available to configure and manage the network of detectors.
9.4. Digital Communication Port shall comply with EIA RS485 Protocol.
10. SAMPLING PIPE
10.1. The sampling pipe shall be smooth bore with an internal diameter between 15-25 mm. normally; pipe with an outside diameter of 25mm and internal diameter of 21mm should be used.
10.2. The pipe material should be FRLS PVC pipe suitable for the environment in which it is installed, or should be the material as required by the specifying body.
10.3. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and made by using solvent cement, except at entry to the detector.
10.4.0 The pipe shall be identified as Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe along its entire length at regular hat of local codes and standards.
10.5.0 All pipes should be supported at not less than 1.5 m centers, or that of the local codes or standards.
10.6.0 The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted an end cap and drilled with a hole appropriately sized to achieve the performance as specified and as calculated by the system design.
11. SAMPLING HOLES
11.1. Sampling Holes of 2mm, or otherwise appropriately sized holes, shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance allowable for conventional detectors as specified in the local codes & standards. Intervals and the diameter may vary according to calculations based on the length of the sampling pipes.
11.2. Each sampling point shall be identified in accordance with Codes or Standards.
11.3 number of Sampling Points and the distance of the Sampling Points from the ceiling and roof structure and forced ventilation systems.
12. INSTALLATION
12.1.
12.2 Where false ceilings are available, the sampling pipe shall be installed above the ceiling, and Capillary Sampling Points shall be installed on the ceiling and connected by means of a capillary tube.
12.3. The minimum internal diameter of the Capillary tube shall be 5mm, the maximum length of the capillary tube shall be 2m unless the manufacturer in consultation with the engineer have specified otherwise.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 222 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
12.4. The Capillary tube shall terminate at a ceiling Sampling Point specifically approved by the Client. The performance characteristics of the sampling points shall be taken into account during the system design.
12.5 Air Sampling Piping network shall be laid as per the approved pipe layout. Pipe work calculations shall be submitted with the proposed pipe layout design for approval.
13. TESTING 13.1. COMMISSIONING TEST
13.1.1 Commissioning of the entire installation shall be done in the presence of the owner and/or its representative.
13.1.2 All necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and labour shall be provided by the Contractor.
13.1.3 The Contractor shall record all tests and system calibrations and a copy of these results shall be retained on site in the system Log Book.
13.2. FUNCTIONAL TEST
13.2.1 Introduce Smoke into the Detector Assembly to provide a basic functional test.
13.2.2 Introduce smoke to the least favorable Sampling Point in each Sampling Pipe. Transport time is not to exceed 90 Secs.
13.3. DOCUMENTATION
13.3.1 The bidder shall be authorized and trained by the manufacturer to design, install, test and maintain the Aspiration Smoke Detection system and shall be able to produce a certificate issued by the manufacturer along with the offer.
13.3.2 The bidder shall submit computer generated software calculations for design of aspirating pipe network, on award of the contract.
13.3.3 Product data and performance criteria shall be submitted by the bidder.
13.3.4 The bidder should provide, as part of handing over, the as-built drawing, operation manual and maintenance manual. The as-built drawing shall exactly match the Sampling pipe layout with the as per pipe software calculation.
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 223 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 224 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
level:+21dBu,Crosstalk<80dB,input impedence:20kohm,signal to noise ratio : >110dB ,with built in protection such
Spec. As
directed by
Architect/EIC
1,18,900 Nos. 118900.00
Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation
Name of Work :- Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning Audio Visual, FAS, SAS, CCTV, BMS & Stage Lighting Work at Auditorium on Plot No. 37, Sector 5, Airoli, Navi Mumbai
Tender Notice No. NMMC/ JCE / ( )/2013-14
SCHEDULE - B
Quantity To be quoted by TendererAmount
(Rs.)
Rates
(Rs.)
Spec No. with
Page No.
Description Unit
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 226 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
as Audio Limiters, Temperature, DC, HF Short Circuit, Peak Current protections
Sub Total of Item No. 4.0 118900.00
Item No. 5.0 : Stage Powered Monitor System
2 Item No. 5.1: SITC of Powered dedicated floor monitor speaker with single 12" LF ,1.5" HF two way loudspeaker
with integral monitor angle.The loudspeaker shall have the frequency . Range (-3 dB): 60 Hz - 18 kHz and should
have a max. Calculated SPL: >=130 dB.The loudspeaker should have an integrated amplifier with power≥1000W
Spec. As
directed by
Architect/EIC
81,200 Nos. 162400.00
Sub Total of Item No. 5.0 162400.00
Item No. 6.0 : Under Balcony & Over Balcony Fill
8 Item No. 6.1: SITC of Dual 8" two way fill speaker with 2x8" LF ,1.3" HF two way loudspeaker with rotatable
horn.The loudspeaker shall have the frequency . Range (-3 dB): 100 - 16 KHz and should have a max. Calculated
SPL: >=125 dB.The loudspeaker should have a nominal impedence :8ohm and Power Handling pk:>=1400W
Spec. As
directed by
Architect/EIC
68,150 Nos. 545200.00
Sub Total of Item No. 6.0 545200.00
Item No. 7.0 : Amplifiers for Under Balcony & Over Balcony Fill
2 Item No. 7.1 : SITC of Class AB Dual channel power amplifier with specification as below or BETTER to suit the
power requirement of proposed speakers; Max Midband Output Power: 600W @ 4 ohms, 900W @ 2 ohms,Max
To be quoted by TendererQuantity Description Spec No. with
Page No.
Rates
(Rs.)
Unit Amount
(Rs.)
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 240 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Percent below / above the
Estimated rates entered in col. 4
Amount quoted by Tenderer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 871 Item No:-1 SITC of MS suspender consisting of fish plate of 150X150X6mm with requisite anchor
fastner, stud with 12mm threaded rod along with straightened MS angle of 50x50x6mm used forsuspending C-Track over the stage area.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
3,767.27 Nos 267476.3636
415 Item No:-2 SITC of MS 'C' tracks made using 3 mm thick HR strips formed track size 50 mm x 40 mmwith extra inward 'U' bend for additional strength and sliding rhombique nuts, provided with 40 mm x 13mm oval slss at 200mm intervals duly powder coated 60 microns black matt finish for suspending stagerigging equipment.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,371.82 Mtrs 569304.5455
Item No:-3 SITC of MS perforated cable trays size 75 x 40mm and 300 x 40mm, 2mm in thickness withcable tray lid powder coated. along with clamping arrangement assuring all cables to be concealed in them.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
106 Item No:-3.1 Size 40 x 75 x 40mm 1,151.82 Mtrs 122092.727310 Item No:-3.2 Size 40 x 150 x 40mm 1,920.00 Mtrs 1920080 Item No:-3.3 Size 40 x 300 x 40mm 3,291.82 Mtrs 263345.451 Item No:-4 SITC of Fixed FOH bar 16 mtr made using dual barrel 40NB of 2mm thickness undergone
through various chemical treatement to keep them rust free, trunking of MS perforated cable trays size 75 x40mm with cable tray lid powder coated for Light Bar with clamping arrangement assuring all the cablesto be concealed in them.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
161,152.73 Lot 161152.73
2 Item No:-5 SITC of MS Side FOH of size 600mm x 1400mm powder coated with black matt texturefinish provided with wall mount brackets powder coated pivoted 4 wheeled suspension trolley with I trackof size 48mmx84mm and fixing arrangements.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
42,058.18 Lot 84116.36
2 Item No:-6 SITC of Motorised winch to be used as 8m Lighting Bar and Frill bar made of 40NB dualbarrel of 2 mm thickness along with 1.5HP 3PH AC motor with DC Brake Necessary pulley, guidepulleys GI wire rope of minimum 5mm in diameter constructed with 6 bundles of 19 strands with fibrecore at center, winding drum Specially designed compact worm gear box Upper and lower limit controllerRequisite cable trunking arrangement ensuring all the cable from C track to the Lighting Bar to be enclosedin it, made of 22SWG CRCA Mild steel in 2 pieces with Epoxy polystered powdered coated in blacktexture with indiviual length of flipflop of 1300mm, thickness of 116mm, width of 22mm
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
341,953.64 Set 683907.27
To be quoted by TendererQuantity Description of Items Spec No. with Page No.
Rates(Rs.)
Unit Amount (Rs.)
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 241 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
4 Item No:-7 SITC of Motorised winch to be used as 7m Lighting Bar and Frill bar made of 40NB dualbarrel of 2 mm thickness along with 1.5HP 3PH AC motor with DC Brake Necessary pulley, guidepulleys GI wire rope of minimum 5mm in diameter constructed with 6 bundles of 19 strands with fibrecore at center, winding drum Specially designed compact worm gear box Upper and lower limit controllerRequisite cable trunking arrangement ensuring all the cable from C track to the Lighting Bar to be enclosedin it, made of 22SWG CRCA Mild steel in 2 pieces with Epoxy polystered powdered coated in blacktexture with indiviual length of flipflop of 1300mm, thickness of 116mm, width of 22mm.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
338,296.36 Set 1353185.45
2 Item No:-8 SITC of Motorised winch to be used as 6.5m Lighting Bar and Frill bar made of 40NB dualbarrel of 2 mm thickness along with 1.5HP 3PH AC motor with DC Brake Necessary pulley, guidepulleys GI wire rope of minimum 5mm in diameter constructed with 6 bundles of 19 strands with fibrecore at center, winding drum Specially designed compact worm gear box Upper and lower limit controllerRequisite cable trunking arrangement ensuring all the cable from C track to the Lighting Bar to be enclosedin it, made of 22SWG CRCA Mild steel in 2 pieces with Epoxy polystered powdered coated in blacktexture with indiviual length of flipflop of 1300mm, thickness of 116mm, width of 22mm.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
334,638.18 Set 669276.36
2 Item No:-9 SITC of Motorised winch to be used as 12m Utility bar Bar made of 40NB dual barrel of 2mm thickness along with 1.5HP 3PH AC motor with DC Brake Necessary pulley, guide pulleys GI wirerope of minimum 5mm in diameter constructed with 6 bundles of 19 strands with fibre core at center,winding drum Specially designed compact worm gear box Upper and lower limit controller.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
338,295.45 Set 676590.91
2 Item No:-10 SITC of MS Side Wing ladder size 600mm x 1400mm powder coated with black matttexture finish provided with grid mount brackets pivoted 4 wheeled suspension trolley with I track of size48mmX84mm and fixing arrangements.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
42,667.27 Set 85334.55
113 Item No:-11 SITC of MS lighting junction box with 16A CEE socket of size 125X112X50mm, dulypowder coated with matt black finish for dimmable points along with the suitable glands.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,261.82 Nos 142585.45
27 Item No:-12 SITC of MS Junction box duly powder coated with black finish 4 way 10A IEC Socket ofsize 140X112X50mm along with the suitable glands.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
987.27 Nos 26656.36
17 Item No:-13 SITC of MS sheet metal fabricated DMX junction of size 125X112X50mm box duly powdercoated and fitted with 5 pin XLR DMX out connector.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,170.00 Nos 19890.00
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 242 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
2 Item No:-14 SITC of MS sheet metal fabricated 18 SWG 70-way power cable termination marshallingbox duly powder coated in black matt texture finish total circuit termination complete with connectors,glands copper busbar and mounting brackets (PMB-70)Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
34,835.45 Nos 69670.91
1 Item No:-15 SITC of Well designed and engineered rack mount type power distribution centre panel withnecessary metering like voltmeter ammeter, Selector switch, outgoing feeders and 400 amps incomer andemergency trip arrangement (PDCP-400) And MCB Panel 27way rack mount internally wired to controlindividual IEC light points with 10A MCBs.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
236,258.18 Nos 236258.18
2 Item No:-16 SITC of 19" Din rack 600mm CRCA apoxy polyster powder coated constucted withaluminium excluded for mounting PDCP, MCBP module and dimmers.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
122,883.64 Nos 245767.27
8 Item No:-17 SITC of MS Fabricated duly powder coated made of 18 SWG power junction box (PJB)with black matt texture finish to terminate the Motorised winch power connections.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,408.18 Nos 11265.45
1 Item No:-18 SITC of Well designed and engineered Wall mount 10 feeder motor control centre panelmade of with 16 SWG with necessary meterings, contactors and internally wired relays to control theLighting Bar,Utility Bar motors (MCCP- 10).Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
101,305.45 Nos 101305.45
1 Item No:-19 SITC of Well designed and engineered wall mount 10-way wired remote control panel madeof 18 SWG with Emergency trip, reset unit to control the light batten (RCP-10)Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
46,447.27 Nos 46447.27
16 Item No:-20 SITC of Auxilary marshalling box 11 way made of fabricated Sheet 22 SWG black matttexture finish with suitable gland and connectors to terminate the power and signal cables for the light bars.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
7,542.73 Nos 120683.64
1 Item No:-21 SITC of Auxilary marshalling box 25 way made of fabricated Sheet 22 SWG black matttexture finish with suitable gland and connectors to terminate the power and signal cables for the FOH bar.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
17,143.64 Nos 17143.64
1 Item No:-22 SITC of MS sheet metal fabricated DMX wall box duly powder coated of size 125X112X50mm in black matt texture finish and fitted IN / OUT 5 pin DMX XLR connectors and plugs with 0.5mtrloop cable.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
3,931.55 Nos 3931.55
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 243 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
3 Item No:-23 SITC of MS sheet metal fabricated 1-way power junction box duly powder coated in blackmatt texture finish and fitted with 2no 10amps IEC socket ON / OFF switch and necessary gland.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies /Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
822.73 Nos 2468.18
1 Item No:-24 SITC of MS sheet metal fabricated 22 SWG emergency push button station for emergencytrip.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft or equivalent with prior approval ofArchitect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
2,011.49 Nos 2011.49
1 Item No:-25 Internal earthing network related to work coming under our scope. 39,433.38 Lot 39433.381 Item No:-26 Installation hardwares such as clamps, connectors, glands, lugs, ferruels, welding rods etc. 118,275.45 Lot 118275.45
20 Item No:-27 1000W halogen fresnel spot light providing illumination of 28000 lux at 2 mtr in spot at 10°beam angle while 4600 lux at 2 mtr when operated in flood at 48° beam angle , dimension as 290 x 405 x290mm, 150mm dia German lens, weight of 4.6Kg, Gx9.5 base lamp socket, 3 mtr power cord with16amps 3 pin CE plug and normal yoke but without lamp and accessories.Lamp - 1000W 230V single ended lampPower supply - 230-240V ACLamp Socket - Gx9.5Power cable - 3 core 1.5 sq. mm. copper PVC insulated Housing - Light weight, rugged and reliable bothindoor and outdoor,Robust pre-treated fabricated housing with die cast component and epoxy polyesterpowder coatedMake:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
19,149.00 Nos 382980.00
R.O. Item No:-28 SITC of 200W LED Fresnel Spot light, 3200k with 7902 lux at 36mtr. in spot, 1004 lux at3mtr. in flood complete with 200mm dia imported German Lens, pole operated yoke provided with 4 leafbarndoor and scrims and with following specifications:LampPower-100W Power supply - 100-230V AC, 50-60HzCRI > 90Control Manual or DMXBeam Angle : 10-50Colour Temperature : 3200KDimension : 395 x 370 x 450mmWeight : 10Kg.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
149,307.42 Nos 0.00
20 Item No:-29 SITC of 1000W spun aluminium PARCAN made out of spun aluminium 16 SWG in 2piece cyclindrical construction with punched slot on Parcan housing for natural ventilation and floatingceramic GX16d base lamp socket, 3mtr copper flexible PVC Insulated power cable with 3 pin CEinsulated plug, Yoke made of MS flat 25 X 3mm with 13mm free mounting hole to fit the adaptor, spigotwith 28mm and filter frame but without lamp. "Lamp: 1000W 240V PAR-64 Lamp Socket: Ceramic typeGX 16D. Power Cable: 3 core,1 Sq.mm copper PVC insulated flexible cable with 10 amps double poletoggle switch Housing: Aluminium sheet cylindrical construction with black epoxy polyester powdercoated" "Switching options: Local control and Digital DMX control through
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
4,608.18 Nos 92163.63636
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 244 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
through Dimmer Dimming option: Digital DMX control through Dimmer Yoke: Fabricated using MS flat-accepts mounting on 28mm spud Focus: Sealed beam angle Accessories: Filter frame. Code: Parcan - 64Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
4 Item No:-30 SITC of 1KW Hologen Theater Spot with 150mm diameter plano covnvex lens with CESafty mark and following specification:Lamp - 1000W 230V single ended lampPower supply - 230-240V ACLamp Socket - Gx9.5Power cable - 3 core 1.5 sq. mm. copper PVC insulatedPower supply - AC 230V, 50Hz.Beam angle - 40° Code: TS - 1006PCMake:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
12,964.55 Nos 51858.18182
16 Item No:-31 SITC of 1KW halogen flood light with textured anodised reflector, R7s base lamp sockets, 3mtr power cord with CE plug, normal yoke, barndoor and filter frame with CE Safty mark.Code:CI-1000FLDMake:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
6,344.55 Nos 101512.7273
6 Item No:-32 SITC of 1KW Halogen Profile Spot light complete but without any accessories Lamp -1000W 230V single ended lamp with following specifications:Power supply - 230-240V ACLamp Socket - Gx9.5Power cable - 3 core 1.5 sq. mm. copper PVC insulatedPower supply - AC 230V, 50Hz.Code: PS - 1002PCMake:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
35,329.09 Nos 211974.5455
ACCESSORIES:-20 Item No:-33 SITC of 4-leaf barndoor for 1000W fresnel spot light. Code:BD-1006.
Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
2,621.82 Nos 52436.36364
85 Item No:-34 SITC of Diecast aluminium "C" clamp with safety pin. SWL 100 Kgs.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,598.18 Nos 135845.4545
85 Item No:-35 SITC of 1.5mtr long safety bond with lock clip to be fixed around the grid and each lightingfixture to avoid fall of the fixture in case if the "C" clamp is not locked properly . SWL 100Kgs.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
676.36 Nos 57490.90909
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 245 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
8 Item No:-36 SITC of Rack mount 12 channel (12chx2.5KW) Dimmer pack with following features and Specifications:Features:Automatic frequency sensor can detect power frequency (45Hz – 63Hz) in different areas and stabilizes thedimming output.Output can be limited from 50% to 100% for over load protection.The thermo-controlled fan will be activated automatically when the temperature is over 45oC.The intelligent thermo-protection will cease the output when over 85oC and restart output when below 65oC.Self testing function to test without a console.Each channel can be set as dimming or non-dimming.Dimming level and internal temperature monitor.Each channel is equipped with a N.F.B.Easy wiring.Specifications:Power Supply: 100-240V AC, 45-63Hz.Output: Maximal 20A per channel.Control: DMX 512 protocolSize: 482 x 132 x 316mm Weight: 13.5Kg.Make:Liteputer/ADB/Zero 88 Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with prior approval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
138,335.45 Nos 1106683.636
3 Item No:-37 SITC of Grid mount photo isolator DMX splitter unit 1 DMX input and 8 isolated outputwith following specifications: Power Supply: 90-240V AC, 45-63Hz.Control: DMX 512 protocolControl Signal input: 5 pin XLR femaleSize: 482 x 44 x 128mm Weight: 2Kg.Make:Liteputer/ADB/Zero 88 Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with prior approval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
56,961.82 Nos 170885.45
1 Item No:-38 SITC of Programmable digital lighting console 248 dimmer channel with following features:• Control Channels:248 or 296 channels of control as standard and can be patched to dimmers and fixtures. • Dimmers:48 faders which control 24 dimmers (two preset mode) or 48 dimmers (wide mode). & 96 faders which control 48 dimmers (two preset mode) or 96 dimmers (wide mode).•Submasters: 20 pages of 10 submasters. 20 pages of 30 submasters.•Groups:400 user definable groups•Palettes:400 user programmable palettes,auto palettes.•Effects:400 user programmable effects•Operating Mode: 3seperate operating modes which can be selected for various operators of different skilllevels•USB Ports:saving and loading show files,support keyboard, mouse, external touch screens, memory sticks, USB CDRW drives, USB
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,367,075.45 Nos 1367075.45
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 246 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
floppy disk drives and desk lights•DMX Output:DMX channels 1 – 512 on four DMX universes as standard.Make:Liteputer/ADB/Zero 88 Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with prior approval of Architect / EIC.
1 Item No:-39 SITC of 700W UPS for lighting console Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
13,020.00 Nos 13020.00
2 Item No:-40 SITC of Dual lens 750W 15° - 30° zoom profile spot light with dimension of 725 x 340 x430mm, Muti faceted dichroic reflector, rotating barrel of +/-25°, four plane stainless steel shutter bladeassembly, G9.5 lamp base, focussing
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
45,569.09 Nos 91138.18182
device, beam shaping shutter 3mtrs power cord with 16amps CE plug and normal yoke but without lampand accessories.Code: CL - 1530Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft / Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
2 Item No:-41 SITC of Dual lens 750W 25° - 50° zoom profile spot light with dimension of 725 x 340 x430mm, Muti faceted dichroic reflector, rotating barrel of +/-25°, four plane stainless steel shutter bladeassembly, G9.5 lamp base, focussing device, beam shaping shutter 3mtrs power cord with 16amps CEplug and normal yoke but without lamp and accessories.Code: CL - 2550Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
45,569.09 Nos 91138.18
2 Item No:-42 SITC of 575W Moving Head Spot - 10A lamp HMI 575W, DMX 512, 2 Gobo wheel, 4gobos + open, one color wheel, 7 colors + open, 3 prism, focus, Iris, Blackout with digital display andflight case.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
132,312.73 Nos 264625.45
1 Item No:-43 SITC of Haze Machine 1500W with Heat up time 12min, Weigth 21Kg, Oil container 2.5L,Fuel: 45min/L (100% output), 2H/L(30% output), DMX 512.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
26,934.55 Nos 26934.55
2 Item No:-44 SITC of 1200W Moving Head Beam, lamp HMI 1200W, DMX 512, CMY, 2 Gobo wheels,Zoom Irish, focus, Pris, Iris, foggy, with LED digital with flight case.Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
345,511.82 Nos 691023.64
4 Item No:-45 SITC of High quality noiseless RGBW LED Par Light 54 x 3 High bright LED with 8channels, Beam 25 degree, DMX 512 controlllable, Master/ Slave mode and sound active.Code: CAN LED 543Make:Canara Lighting/Stage Technologies/Stage Craft Chauvet/ Arri or equivalent with priorapproval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
28,480.91 Nos 113923.64
8 Item No:-46 SITC of 750W G9.5 base HPL lamps.Make:Philips/Osram/GE or equivalent with prior approval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,903.64 Nos 15229.09
30 Item No:-47 SITC of 1000W 240V Gx9.5 base tungsten halogen lamps.Make:Philips/Osram/GE or equivalent with prior approval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,332.73 Nos 39981.82
CLIENT : N.M.M.C. Page 247 of 250 ARCHITECT : THE FIRM
Signature of Tenderer No. of Corrections Signature of N.M.M.C. Officer
20 Item No:-48 SITC of 1000W PAR 64 Gx16d base sealed Medium beam lamps.Make:Philips/Osram/GE or equivalent with prior approval of Architect / EIC.
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
1,985.45 Nos 39709.09
16 Item No:-49 SITC of 1000W 240V R7s base double ended tungsten halogen lamps. Make:Philips/Osram/GE
Spec. As directed by Engineer-In-
Charge
520.91 Nos 8334.55
Item No:- 50.0 CONSUMABLES:-1 Item No 50.1 :- SITC of Assorted colour gel filter roll size 4ft x 25ft.Make:Format/Lee/Rosco 8,950.91 Roll 8950.9114 Item No 50.2 :- SITC of 5 pin XLR male / female connectors 537.27 Nos 7521.828 Item No 50.3 : -SITC of 5 Pin XLR Termination plug 585.45 Nos 4683.641 Item No 50.4 :- SITC of Aluminium black wrap 2ft x 24ft. 8,950.91 Roll 8950.91
Item No:-51.0 CABLES:-10 Item No:-51.1 SITC of PVC armoured copper cable 1.1KV grade confirming to IS1544 size 3.5core x 95
sq mm for laying between SFU and PDCP.Make:Brimson/Polycab/Walna
